Course
Specifications for
Physics Program
الـمـمـلكـة الـعـربـيـة الـسـعـوديـة
الـعـالـيوزارة الـتـعـلـيـم
جـامـعـة الـمـجـمـعـة
بالزلفي كلية العلوم قسم الفيزياء
بسم هللا الرحمن الرحيم
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Higher Education Majmaah University
College of Sciences in Alzulfi Department of Physics
Program Study Plan
1- Compulsory and elective requisites
Requisite Type of requisite Total credit
hours
Percentage of
credit hours Observations
University Compulsory 8 5.88
Elective 4 2.94
College Compulsory 92 92.92
Elective -- --
Department Compulsory 83 61.03
Elective 9 6.62
Free courses 2 9.92
Total hours and percentage 136 %211
2- University Requisites
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
ARAB 101 Linguistic skills 9 (9+1+1) -- Compulsory
SALM 101 Introduction to Islamic
Culture 9 (9+1+1) -- Compulsory
SALM 102 Islam and building
society 9 (9+1+1) -- Compulsory
SALM 103 Economical system in
Islam 9 (9+1+1) -- Compulsory
-- -- University Elective 9 (9+1+1) -- Elective
-- -- University Elective 9 (9+1+1) -- Elective
3- Compulsory College Requisites
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PCOM 113 Computer Skills 9 (9+1+1) --
PMTH 112 Introduction to 9 (9+1+1) --
mathematics 1
PENG 111 English 1 for prep. Year 8 (9+6+1) --
PSSC 114 Learning and
communication skills 9 (9+1+1) --
PMTH 127 Introduction to
mathematics 2 4 (2+1+2) --
PENG 123 English for engineering
and science 9 (9+1+1) --
PPHS 128 Physics 2 (9+9+1) --
PENG 229 English 2 for prep. year 6 (9+4+1) --
4- Elective College Courses
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
5- Compulsory Department Requisites
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
MATH 201 Calculus 1 2 (2+1+1) --
PHYS 201 General Physics 1 4 (2+2+1) --
PHYS 919 General Physics 2 4 (2+2+1) PHYS 201
MATH 919 Calculus 2 2 (9+2+1) MATH 201
PHYS 922 Classical Mechanics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 201
MATH 201
PHYS 922 Waves and Vibrations 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 201
MATH 201
PHYS 942 Thermodynamics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 201
PHYS 922 Thermal Physics Lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 201
PHYS 212 Mathematical Physics 1 2 (2+1+1) MATH 202
MATH 221 Differential Equations 3 (2+ 0 +1) MATH 202
PHYS 292 Electromagnetism 1 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 202
PHYS 229 Optics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 231
PHYS 252 Modern Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 231
MATH 294 Partial Differential
Equations 2 (2+1+1) MATH 310
PHYS 302 Mathematical Physics 2 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 301
PHYS 222 Optics Lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 332
PHYS 249 Statistical Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 241
PHYS 229 Electromagnetism Lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 321
PHYS 259 Quantum Mechanics 1 3 (2+1+1) PHYS 351
PHYS 324
PHYS 299 Electromagnetism 2 3 (2+1+1) PHYS 321
PHYS 499 Electronics 4 (2+2+1) PHYS 202
PHYS 459 Quantum Mechanics 2 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 352
PHYS 425 Modern Physics Lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 351
PHYS 482 Nuclear Physics 1 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 351
PHYS 472 Solid state physics 1 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 352
PHYS 455 Atomic and molecular
physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 352
PHYS 427 Solid state physics lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 471
PHYS 428 Nuclear Physics lab. 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 422 Project 9 (1+9+1) PHYS 497
PHYS 498
6- Training requisites
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 426 Practical training -- PHYS 392
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PCOM 113 Computer Skills 2 --
PMTH 112 Introduction to
mathematics 1 2 --
PSSC 114 Learning and
communication skills 2 --
PENG 111 English 1 for prep. Year 8 --
Institution Majmaah university Date of Report College/Department Mathematics Department - Faculty of science
A. Course Identification and General Information 1. Course title and code: Introduction to Mathematics (1) PMTH 112 2. Credit hours 2 Hours 3. Program(s) in which the course is offered. (If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course 5. Level/year at which this course is offered First (Preparatory year) 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) 7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) 8. Location if not on main campus 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply) a. Traditional classroom What percentage? b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage? c. e-learning What percentage? d. Correspondence What percentage? f. Other What percentage? Comments:
√
√
√
10
40
50
B Objectives 1. What is the main purpose for this course? The course aims to provide the students with an amount of knowledge, cognitive skills and interpersonal skills. Also, taking responsibility, communication skills and the use of information technology, along with psychomotor skills. 2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
To develop and improve the curriculum there is a use of the means of modern technology in teaching such as (the smart board and Data show) during the lecture. Diversify of the information sources (Allocated textbook, reference books and from specialized sites on the internet. in addition to the electronic library services). In abreast with the information technology revolution, which allows students to access the latest scientific researches published in scientific journals, which leads to students depending on themselves more in the learning process hoped for?
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook should be attached) 1 Topics to be Covered
List of Topics No of Weeks Contact hours
A review of basic Concept and skills 3 6
Equations and Inequalities 3 6
Relations, Functions and Graphs 3 6
Polynomials and Rational Functions 3 6
Exponential and Logarithmic Functions 3 6
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact Hours Self-Study Other Total
ECTS NCCCA Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
3 cp 2 ch 30 0 0 0 42 18 90 ch
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes Course Teaching
Strategies Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 able to write the number properties, algebraic expressions, graphs linear equation and quadratic equation
Start each Lecture by general idea and the
benefit of it. Demonstrate the
course information and principles
through lectures.
Exams Midterms Final examination
1.2 able to recognize and define logarithmic
functions and exponential functions, inverse functions, synthetic division and remainder theorem and linear equations, linear inequalities & absolute value equations and quadratic equations
Provide main ways to deal with the exercises
Continuous discussions with the students during the lectures
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Define and Recognize the fundamental in
basic mathematics such as:
logarithmic functions and exponential
functions, inverse functions, synthetic
division and remainder theorem and linear
equations, linear inequalities & absolute
value equations and quadratic equations
Encourage the
student to look for
some complicated
problems in the
different references.
Midterm exams
Quizzes.
2.2 Outline logical thinking. Ask the student to
attend lectures for
practice solving
problem.
Doing homework.
Check the problems
solution.
Student's ability to write Mathematical
equations in a correct mathematical way.
Homework
assignments.
Discussion of how to
simplify or analyses
some problems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
2-3 hours
3.1 The student should illustrate how take up
responsibility.
Ask the students to
search the internet
and use the library.
Encourage them how
to attend lectures
regularly by
assigning marks for
attendance.
Quizzes of some
previous lectures.
Ask the absent
students about last
lecture.
3.2 Must be shown the ability of working
independently and with groups.
Teach them how to
cover missed lectures.
Give students tasks of
duties
Discussion during the
lecture.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 The student should illustrate how to
communicating with: Peers, Lecturers and
Community.
Creating working
groups with peers to
collectively prepare:
solving problems and
search the internet for
some topics.
Discussing group work
sheets.
4.2 The student should interpret how to Know
the basic mathematical principles using the
internet.
Give the students
tasks to measure their:
mathematical skills,
computational analysis
and problem solving.
Discuses with them the
results of computations
analysis and problem
solutions.
The student should appraise how to Use
the computer skills and library.
Encourage the student
to ask for help if
needed.
Give homework's to
know how the student
understands the
numerical skills.
The student should illustrate how to
Search the internet and using software
programs to deal with problems.
Encourage the student
to ask good question
to help solve the
problem.
Give them comments
on some resulting
numbers.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5.2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project, examination,
speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment 1
Midterm 1 5th week 20%
2
Midterm 1 10th week 20%
3
Homework + reports During
the
semester
20%
4
Final exam End of
semester
40 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support 1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
1- 10-office hours per week in the lecturer schedule.
2- The contact with students by e-mail and website. E. Learning Resources 1. List Required Textbooks College Algebra and Trigonometry – Part 1 2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.) Aufmann ,Barker and Nation "College Algebra and Trigonometry" Fifth Edition ,New York (2005) Edward B. Burger et al. "Algebra 1" New York (2007) Edward B. Burger et al. "Algebra 2" New York (2007) 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) College Algebra and Trigonometry – Part 1 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.) 5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and software.
- Sufficient number of computers .
- Various Office programs on all computers.
- Special programs for math symbols on all computers. F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
There is an urgent need to coordinate with the Admission and Registration Deanship to make the course of (4 credit hours and 4 actual hours) instead of (2 credit hours and 3 actual hours) to give the students and the course their due right of teaching to cover various scientific topics properly.
That the number of computers per lecture hall should be 15 – 20.
Data show and their own remotes should be available.
A smart board should be available in every hall with the need to give faculty members private workshops to deal with it 1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
- Classrooms equipped with computers connected to the internet.
- individual offices for each faculty member.
- Sports halls for students.
- A Cafeteria available for students and faculty members.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Each hall should have between 15 - 20 computers in addition to a computer for the faculty member.
Providing technical support for classrooms. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes 1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching - Developing of a questionnaire distributed among students to measure how well students accept the Textbook and take advantage of it at the end of the semester in an attempt of improvement. - Conducting discussions with students about the teaching method, strategies and taking into consideration their opinions. - Meeting with students individually. 2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
- Discuss results periodically with the other course teachers.
- Recording suggestions of colleagues continuously to improve the course. Discussion of the problems and there solutions with the faculty bored. 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching Preparation workshops for faculty members in cooperation with the different departments, councils and the deanship. 4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of assignments with staff at another institution) Taking a sample of student's work to be reviewed by colleagues in the department. - Exchanges marking of tests with colleagues.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for improvement. - Presenting the study plan on the board of the department and discussing developments at the end of each semester in an attempt to avoid the disadvantages and increase the advantages. - Recording suggestions of colleagues continuously to improve the course. - Revision of the course at the end of semester, to provide or change some of the examples and questions. - Establishing a questionnaire distributed among the students about the development of that course and getting suggestions for improving and developing.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________ Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __________ Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PMTH 297 Introduction to
mathematics 2 4 --
PENG 292 English for engineering
and science 9 --
PPHS 298 Physics 2 --
PENG 292 English 2 for prep. Year 6 --
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report 15/7/1435
College/Department Preparatory Year
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: , PMTH 127
2. Credit hours 4 Hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Mathematics, level 2, which supports programs of the Faculty of Science, Faculty of Engineering,
Faculty of Medicine and Faculty of Computer science.
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course KAMAL NAZMI
5. Level/year at which this course is offered First year – Level two
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) PMTH 112
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus Main Campus , Zulfi city
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
90 %
10%
%%
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
The course aims at providing the student with the proper knowledge, cognitive skills,
interpersonal skills, responsibility, communication skills, use of information technology skills
and self – kinetics skills.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
In order to improve this course, it is important to use different means of modern technology
during lectures such as smart boards and data show projectors. It is also important to vary the
sources of information (the course book, references, websites and the electronic library). This
will be in line with the information revolution, which allows students to access the latest
scientific research published in scientific journals and enables students to depend on themselves
in the desired learning process.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
Topics to be cover
List of Topic
No
. o
f W
eek
s
Contact hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
Self- Study
Dis
cuss
ion
s
tota
l
Lec
ture
tuto
rial
s
Lab
Off
ice
Hou
rs
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
An introduction to Trigonometric
Functions
2 8 4
12 1 1 2 1 17
Trigonometric Identities, Inverses,
and Equations
3 12 6
18 2 1 3 1 25
Mid-term 1 2 2 2
System of equations and Inequalities
2 8 4
12 1 1 2 1 17
Matrices and Matrix Applications
2 8 4
12 1 1 2 1 17
Mid-term 2 2 2 2
Analytic Geometry and the conic section
3 12 6
18 2 1 1 1 13
Additional topics in algebra:
Sequences and series &Mathematical
Induction
2 8 4
12 1 1 2 1 17
Review 2 2 4
Final Exam 2 2 2
Total 90 8 6 14 8 116
Note: one credit hour is equal 25 – 30 load work hour
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact Hours Self-Study Other Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
3 56 28 32 116
1. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
2. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 a) Convert between degrees and radians for nonstandard
angles, find fixed ratios of the sides of the special
triangles ,solve general applications of right triangle
b) Use fundamental Identities to express a given trig
function in terms of the other five and basic algebra
skills. Derive and use the double-angle identities, solve
applications using these identities
c) To solve linear and nonlinear systems by substitution,
elimination
d) Solve systems using matrix equations, Find determinants
and inverse of a square matrix
e) Use the equations of circle ,ellipse ,hyperbola and
parabola to sketch and locate the foci , center ,vertices
f) Write out the terms of sequences and series, identify an
arithmetic and geometric sequences. Find the nth terms
of an arithmetic, apply mathematical inductions
Start each chapter by
general idea and the
benefit of it.
Demonstrate the course
information and
principles through
lectures.
Exams
Midterms
Final examination.
1.2 Outline the logical thinking.
Provide main ways to
deal with the exercises.
Home work.
State the physical problems by mathematical method. Solve some examples
during the lecture.
Continuous
discussions with
the students
during the
lectures.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 The students will explain and interpret a general
knowledge of Linear Algebra.
Encourage the student to
look for some complicated
problems in the different
references.
Midterm exams
Quizzes.
2.2 Enable students to analyses the mathematical
problems.
Ask the student to attend
lectures for practice
solving problem.
Doing homework.
Check the problems
solution.
Student's ability to write physical equations in a
correct mathematical way.
Homework assignments. Discussion of how to
simplify or analyses some
4 Hours
problems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 The student should illustrate how take up
responsibility.
Ask the students to search
the internet and use the
library.
Encourage them how to
attend lectures regularly
by assigning marks for
attendance.
Quizzes of some previous
lectures.
Ask the absent students
about last lecture.
3.2 Must be shown the ability of working
independently and with groups.
Teach them how to cover
missed lectures.
Give students tasks of
duties
Discussion during the
lecture.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 The student should illustrate how to
communicating with: Peers, Lecturers and
Community.
Creating working groups
with peers to collectively
prepare: solving problems
and search the internet for
some topics.
Discussing a group work
sheets.
4.2 The student should interpret how to Know the
basic mathematical principles using the internet.
Give the students tasks to
measure their:
mathematical skills,
computational analysis
and problem solving.
Discuses with them the
results of computations
analysis and problem
solutions.
The student should appraise how to Use the
computer skills and library.
Encourage the student to
ask for help if needed.
Give homework's to know
how the student
understands the numerical
skills.
The student should illustrate how to Search the
internet and using software programs to deal with
problems.
Encourage the student to
ask good question to help
solve the problem.
Give them comments on
some resulting numbers.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5.2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assess
ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of
Final
Assessment
1 Midterm 1 5th
week 25 %
2 Midterm 1 10th
week 25%
3 Homework + reports During the
semester
10%
4
Final exam End of
semester
40 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
1- 6-office hours per week in the lecturer schedule.
2- The contact with students by e-mail , mobile, office telephone and website.
E. Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
JOHN W. COBURN: ALGEBRA TRIGONOMETRY , ACUSTOM PUBLICATION BY :
Mc Graw Hill Education, Second Edition 2010
2. Essential References
COLLEGE ALGEBRA & TRIGONOMETRY by Richard N. Aufmann - Houghton Miffin
company – Boston , New York – 4th
Edition
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List):
Same as mention above.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
ALGEBRA & TRIGONOMETRY – 2nd
edition: ROBERT BLITZER
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations: None
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
-Classroom with capacity of 30-students.
- Library.
2. Computing resources: Not available
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list): None
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching: Student
evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the
Department
The colleagues who teach the same course discuss together to evaluate their teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
- Course report, Program report and Program self-study.
- A tutorial lecture must be added to this course.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking
by an independent member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic
exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of assignments with staff at another
institution)
The instructors of the course are checking together and put a unique process of
evaluation.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course
effectiveness and planning for improvement.
1-The following points may help to get the course effectiveness:
* Student evaluation.
* Course report.
* Program report.
* Program self-study.
2- According to point 1 the plan of improvement should be given
Faculty or Teaching Staff: KAMAL NAZMI
Signature: Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 25/3/1435
College/Department College of Science Al-Zulfi / Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Physics for Engineering students // (PHY 128)
2. Credit hours 3 hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ahmed Adel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered Preparatory Year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
NO
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
No
8. Location if not on main campus
College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 85% and
Traditional online with 15%]
B Objectives
√
√
85 %
15 %
What is the main purpose for this course?
The main objective of this course is to provide the students with a background of basic physics
concepts, which allows them to understand the general laws of mechanics and electricity.
At the end of this course, students should be capable to
1. Understand the fundamental laws and principles of mechanics and electricity.
2. Describe the nature phenomena by using the language of physics.
3. Solve physics problems efficiently through the appropriate use of basic mathematical and
physical concepts.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1. Annual review of the course using recent textbooks and references.
2. Electronic materials and computer based programs are used to support the lecture
course.
3. Increase use of video material
4. Exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Units and measurement 3 - - 3 1 1 3 1 9
Vectors 3 - - 3 1 2 3 1 10
Motion along straight line 6 - - 6 1 2 3 1 13
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Motion in two dimensions
and three dimensions
6 - - 6 1 1 3 1 12
Force and motion I 6 - - 6 2 1 3 1 13
Force and motion II 6 - - 6 1 1 3 1 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Kinetic energy, work, and
power 6 - - 6 1 1 3 1 12
Electricity 6 - - 6 1 2 3 1 13
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 9 11 24 8 100
Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact hours Self-Study Others Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
NCAAA 3 48 --- --- --- 52 --- 100
ECTS 5 48 --- --- --- 52 --- 100
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop.
A description of teaching strategies used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Recognize the fundamental physical quantities and their
units.
Developing basic
communicative ability
through:
- Lecturing
- Team work
- Class Participation
- Graded homework
- Quizzes
- Midterms
1.2 Describe straight‐line motion in terms of velocity and
acceleration.
1.3 Define vectors in Cartesian and polar Coordinates and
their addition in terms of their Cartesian components.
3 Hours
- Discussion
- Exercises
- Final Exam
1.4 Identify the concept of force and relate it to the mass and
acceleration of the object.
1.5 Define Weight, normal force, and contact force.
1.6 Recognize the kinetic energy, work and power
1.7 Define electric field and electric potential.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Demonstrate the ability to solve basic problems of
physics in those practical situations covered in the
course.
- Problem solving
-Class discussion
-Project presentation
- Class Participation
- Presentation
- Essay Question
- Research
2.2 Use the vector notation in order to separate the two or
three dimensional problems into their components along
different Cartesian directions and solve each
independently.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
2.4 Analyze and utilize Newton’s laws of motion.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Completing assignments in due time.
-Discussion with students
- Making students aware
about time management in
completing their assignments
and projects
-Encourage students to help
each other
- Group presentation
- Group assignments
- Evaluation of group reports
and individual contribution
within the group
- Peer or self-assessment
-Performance on midterms
and final exams are evidence
of the student’s ability to
retain and analyze information
3.2 Participate in class discussion and think critically.
3.3 Acting responsibly and ethically in carrying out
individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Communicate, listen, negotiate, and evaluate their
strengths and weaknesses as members of a team.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Developing the student skills in the usage of computer,
network, and software packages relevant to nuclear
physics.
- Exercises
- Problem solving
- Oral quizzes
- Essay questions
-Oral Presentation
-Oral Examination
-Essay Question
4.2 Improving student communication skills such as :
writing, reading, presenting, negotiating and debating
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Understand the
fundamental laws and
Recognize the fundamental physical
quantities and their units.
1,2 2 a,b
principles of mechanics
and electricity
Analyze and utilize Newton’s laws of
motion.
1,2,6 2,4 c
Define electric field and electric
potential 1,2 2 a,b
Describe the nature
phenomena by using the
language of physics. .
Describe straight‐line motion in terms
of velocity and acceleration.
1,2,5 2 a
Identify the concept of force and relate
it to the mass and acceleration of the
object.
2,5 2 a
Recognize the kinetic energy, work and
power
1,2 2 a
Solve physics problems
efficiently through the
appropriate use of basic
mathematical and physical
concepts.
Solve problems for two‐dimensional
motion by decomposing it into its
components.
6,10 4 b,c,d
Derive mathematical expressions for
projectile motion.
21 4 c
Solve problems involving friction. 6 4 b,d
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form
and orally using appropriate scientific
language.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Construct the mathematical formulation
suitable for the theoretical analysis of
various decay modes.
14,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation -
20%
5 Homework Weekly
6 Quizzes End of topics
7 Discussions Weekly
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials -
10 Computer tools used Every report
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Office hours 6 hr/ week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Introductory Physics .
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.) Physics for Scientists and Engineers, Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, Thomson Brooks/Cole © 2004;
6th Edition
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Schaum's Outline of College Physics, 11th Edition (Schaum's Outline Series) F. J. Bueche and E. Hechet,
McGraw-Hill
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://science.pppst.com/physics.html
http://physwiki.ucdavis.edu
http://www.physics.org
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software. Physics Simulation Softwares.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room with at least 25 seats.
Auditorium of a capacity of not less than 100 seats for large lecture format classes
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.) A smart board to write on and computer.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list) Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching Student evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor There is a department committee responsible for the development of the strategies of Teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 1. Course report.
2. Program report.
3. Training Courses.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 1- Course Evaluation
2- Exam Evaluation
3- Improvement plan
4- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
5- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
IC 212 Introduction to Islamic
culture 9 --
MATH 912 Calculus 1 2 --
PHYS 912 General Physics 1 4 --
ARAB 212 Linguistic Skills 9 --
--- -- Free course 2 --
ZPSY 212 Thinking skills and
learning methods. 9 --
--- -- University elective course 9 --
Institution Faculty of Science Date of Report 4/5/1434
College/Department Mathematics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Calculus (I) for physics, MATH 201
2. Credit hours 4 (3+1) Hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course Abd El-Nasser Ghareeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered Third level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus Main Campus , Zulfi city
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
√
√
60
40
B Objectives
3. What is the main purpose for this course? Study of main concepts of Calculus (I) for physics as
follows:
Real numbers and real line – Inequality- Functions – The graph of a function – even and odd
functions – composite of functions – Review of Trigonometric functions – inverse functions –
Limits– Properties of Limits – Techniques for Evaluating Limits – Infinites Limits-
Continuity– Properties of continuity- The Derivative of a function – Differentiability and
continuity – Chain rule – Derivatives of Trigonometric functions – Logarithmic and
exponential functions and their derivatives – Hyperbolic functions- Inverse trigonometric
functions and their derivatives- Extrema on an interval – Rolle's theorem and the mean value
theorem – Increasing and Decreasing functions and the first derivative test – concavity and
second derivative test –Optimization and graphs plotting– related rates- Conic sections.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1-Cooprate with other educational institutions to find how they deal with the subject.
2- Re- new the course references frequently.
3-Frequently check the latest discovery in science to improve the course objectives.
5- Posting some course material on the websites to help the students.
6- Focusing on generic skills.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
Topics to be cover
List of Topic
No. of
Weeks
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct Self- Study
Dis
cuss
ion
s
tota
l
Lec
ture
tuto
rial
s
Lab
Off
ice
Hou
rs
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Hom
ewo
rk
Real numbers and real line –
Inequality- Functions – The graph
of a function – even and odd
functions – composite of functions
2 6 2 0 1 8 2 4 8 23
Review of Trigonometric
functions – inverse functions –
Limits – Properties of Limits –
Techniques for Evaluating Limits
2 6 2 0 1 8 2 4 8 23
Infinites Limits- Continuity– 4 12 4 0 2 16 2 2 10 14
Properties of continuity- The
Derivative of a function –
Differentiability and continuity –
Chain rule – Derivatives of
Trigonometric functions –
Logarithmic and exponential
functions First Mid Term Exam
Hyperbolic functions - Inverse
trigonometric functions and their
derivatives - Extrema on an
interval
2 6 2 0 1 8 2 4 8 23
Rolle's theorem and the mean
value theorem – Increasing and
Decreasing functions and the first
derivative test
2 6 2 0 1 8 2 4 8 23
Second Mid Term Exam
Concavity and second derivative
test – Optimization and graphs
plotting – related rates - Conic
sections.
2 6 2 0 1 8 2 4 8 23
Final Exam
Total 14 42 14 7 63 12 22 50 12
9
Note: one credit hour is equal 25 – 30 load work hour
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact Hours Self-Study Other Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
3 42 14 84 129
4. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
5. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Define Real numbers and real line – Inequality-
Functions – The graph of a function – even and odd
functions – composite of functions – Review of
Trigonometric functions – inverse functions –
Limits– Properties of Limits – Techniques for
Evaluating Limits – Infinites Limits- Continuity–
Start each chapter by
general idea and the
benefit of it.
Demonstrate the course
information and principles
Exams
Midterms
Final examination.
3 Hours
Properties of continuity.
through lectures.
1.2 Outline The Derivative of a function –
Differentiability and continuity – Chain rule –
Derivatives of Trigonometric functions –
Logarithmic and exponential functions and their
derivatives – Hyperbolic functions- Inverse
trigonometric functions and their derivatives-
Extrema on an interval.
Provide main ways to deal
with the exercises.
Home work.
State Rolle's theorem and the mean value theorem –
Increasing and Decreasing functions and the first
derivative test – concavity and second derivative
test –Optimization and graphs plotting– related
rates- Conic sections.
Solve some examples
during the lecture.
Continuous discussions
with the students during the
lectures.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 The students will explain and interpret a general
knowledge of differential equations.
Encourage the student to
look for some complicated
problems in the different
references.
Midterm exams
Quizzes.
2.2 Enable students to analyses the mathematical
problems.
Ask the student to attend
lectures for practice
solving problem.
Doing homework.
Check the problems
solution.
Student's ability to write physical equations in a
correct mathematical way.
Homework assignments. Discussion of how to
simplify or analyses some
problems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 The student should illustrate how take up
responsibility.
Ask the students to search
the internet and use the
library.
Encourage them how to
attend lectures regularly
by assigning marks for
attendance.
Quizzes of some previous
lectures.
Ask the absent students
about last lecture.
3.2 Must be shown the ability of working
independently and with groups.
Teach them how to cover
missed lectures.
Give students tasks of
duties
Discussion during the
lecture.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 The student should illustrate how to Creating working groups
with peers to collectively
Discussing a group work
communicating with: Peers, Lecturers and
Community.
prepare: solving problems
and search the internet for
some topics.
sheets.
4.2 The student should interpret how to Know the
basic mathematical principles using the internet.
Give the students tasks to
measure their:
mathematical skills,
computational analysis
and problem solving.
Discuses with them the
results of computations
analysis and problem
solutions.
The student should appraise how to Use the
computer skills and library.
Encourage the student to
ask for help if needed.
Give homework's to know
how the student
understands the numerical
skills.
The student should illustrate how to Search the
internet and using software programs to deal with
problems.
Encourage the student to
ask good question to help
solve the problem.
Give them comments on
some resulting numbers.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5.2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assess
ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of
Final
Assessment
1 Midterm 1 5th
week 20 %
2 Midterm 2 15th
week 20%
4 Homework + reports During the
semester
20%
5
Final exam End of
semester
40 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
1- 8-office hours per week in the lecturer schedule.
2- The contact with students by e-mail and website.
E. Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
Physics For Engineers And Scientists: by Gebhard von Oppen, Frank Melchert , Jones &
Bartlett Learning (November 15, 2006).
2. Essential References
Quick Calculus: A Self-Teaching Guide, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons; 2nd edition (October
28, 1985)
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List):
Same as mention above.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
None
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations: None
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
-Classroom with capacity of 30-students.
- Library.
2. Computing resources: Not available
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list): None
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching: Student
evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the
Department
The colleagues who teach the same course discuss together to evaluate their teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
- Course report, Program report and Program self-study.
- A tutorial lecture must be added to this course.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking
by an independent member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic
exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of assignments with staff at another
institution)
The instructors of the course are checking together and put a unique process of
evaluation.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course
effectiveness and planning for improvement.
1-The following points may help to get the course effectiveness:
* Student evaluation.
* Course report.
* Program report.
* Program self-study.
2- According to point 1 the plan of improvement should be given
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Abd El-Nasser Ghareeb
Signature: Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: ____15-4-2014___________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 10/4/2014
College/Department : College of Science / Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Physics I (PHYS 201)
2. Credit hours: 4 (3+2+0)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor of Physics (BSc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course:
Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 3rd level / 2nd year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): ---
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any): ---
8. Location if not on main campus:
Complex of colleges in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The other 25% is conducted in the laboratory.
√
25
75
√
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course? This course is an introductory course for the fundamental principles of physics in mechanics. The
student will be studying the main concepts of: Mechanics, dynamics, gravitation, energy,
momentum and fluid dynamics.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
It is intended in this course to:
1. Update the content periodically.
2. Spare more working hours on e-learning, where some lectures and short exams will be delivered online.
3. Use more software simulations to some of the principles covered. 4. Add new experiments in the laboratory that covers the topic of energy.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l of
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Wo
rk L
oad
Lect
ure
tuto
rial
s
Lab
Inte
rne
t
Lib
rary
Ho
me
wo
rk
Lab
.
rep
ort
s
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Physics and Measurements 3 4 7 3 1 3 4 1 1
9 Motion in 1 dimension 4 2 6 3 1 2 2 1 1
5 Vectors 2 2 4 2 1 2 2 1 1
2 Motion in 2 dimensions 6 6 1
2
4 1 5 6 1 2
7 Mid-term 1 1 1 1
Laws of motion 6 4 1
0
4 1 5 4 1 2
5 Energy and energy transfer 5 5 4 1 2 1 1
3 Potential energy 3 3 2 1 2 1 9
Mid-term 2 1 1 1
Linear momentum and
collisions
4 2 6 3 1 2 2 1 1
5 Elasticity 1 2 3 2 1 2 2 1 1
1
Fluid mechanics 5 5 4 1 2 1 1
3 Review 2 2 2
Final Exam 2 2 2 2
Total 45 24 6
9
3
1
1
0
2
7
2
0
1
0
1
6
7
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 45 24 69
Credit 3 1 4
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with
Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains and Course Learning
Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To know and describe the basic principles of
mechanics, dynamics, energy, and momentum. Lectures
In-class discussions
Exercises
Exams.
Homework.
Classwork.
Quizzes. 1.2
To apply the formulas learned to solve the
different applications of the related topics.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
To distinguish between the one and two
dimensional mechanics, kinetic and potential
energies, elastic and inelastic collisions, and to
analyze the schematics and diagrams related to
it.
Lectures.
Problem solving
Case study.
Small group work.
Lab. demonstrations.
Exams.
Homework.
Classwork.
Quizzes.
Lab. Reports.
In-lab. evaluation.
6.5 hours
2.2
To write laboratory reports. Relate the
experiments to the theories related. To explain
and justify the results obtained from the
experiment.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 To participates in class discussion. Practice the
safety and organizing rules of the laboratories.
Awareness of time management in completing their reports.
Encourage students to help each other
Group assignments
Lectures.
Case study.
Small group work.
Lab. demonstrations.
Whole group discussion.
Respecting deadlines.
Helping each other in doing their experiments.
Giving clear and logical arguments
In-lab. evaluation (Showing active class participation).
Oral exams.
3.2
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Displays teamwork and shows
professional commitment to ethical practice.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 To communicate with the teacher and students
using communications technology.
Encourage students to use program soft wear
Whole group discussion.
Lecture.
Lab. demonstrations.
E-mail correspondences.
E-learning.
Exams.
Homework.
Lab reports
4.2 To use software programs in writing, inserting
and analyzing data, and plotting graphs.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
To assemble the experiment correctly. To
operate the experiment and any attached
computer quickly and accurately. Lab. demonstrations.
Lab. reports.
In-lab. evaluation
5.2 To measure the different physical parameters in
the laboratory professionally and accurately.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Provide a clear
understanding of the basic
concepts and integrating
To know and describe the basic principles
of mechanics, dynamics, energy, and
momentum.
a, b 1, 2 a, b
their knowledge in the
disciplines of mechanics,
dynamics, energy, and
momentum.
To apply the formulas learned to solve
the different applications of the related
topics.
a, b 1, 2 c, d
To distinguish between the one and two
dimensional mechanics, kinetic and
potential energies, elastic and inelastic
collisions, and to analyze the schematics
and diagrams related to it.
c, d, e 4, 5, 6 e, f
To write laboratory reports. Relate the
experiments to the theories related. To
explain and justify the results obtained
from the experiment.
c, d, e 4, 5, 6 g, h
Develop learning skills
using. Experimental tools in
physics lab.
To participates in class discussion.
Practice the safety and organizing rules of
the laboratories.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9,
10 k, l
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Displays teamwork and
shows professional commitment to
ethical practice.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9,
10 k
Develop positive attitudes
towards seeking facts and
scientific research.
To communicate with the teacher and
students using communications
technology.
j (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
To use software programs in writing,
inserting and analyzing data, and plotting
graphs.
j (1, 3, 4,
5) 12, 13 P
Provide a foundation for
most of other physics
laboratories and the skill of
using different devices.
To assemble the experiment correctly. To
operate the experiment and any attached
computer quickly and accurately.
K (1 ,2,
3) 14 g
To measure the different physical
parameters in the laboratory
professionally and accurately.
K (1 ,2,
3) 14 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group
project, examination, speech, oral
presentation, etc.)
Week Due
Proportion of
Total Assessment
1 First exam 5-6 15 %
2 Second Exam 10-11 15 %
3 Final Exam 16 40 %
4 Lab. reports weekly 10 %
5 In-lab. evaluation weekly 5%
6 Final practical exam 15 10 %
7 Quizzes --
5 % 8 Homework --
9 classwork --
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the academic advisor assigned for each student, or
from the unit of academic guidance.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Physics for scientists and engineers; Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett; Cengage Learning; 9th edition;
(2013).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Physics; John D. Cutnell and Kenneth W. Johnson; John Wiley & Sons; 9th edition; (2012).
College Physics; Raymond A. Serway and Chris Vuille; Cengage Learning; 9th edition; (2011).
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://demonstrations.wolfram.com
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/salzobaidi
http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr161/lect/history/newton3laws.html
http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr161/lect/history/newtonkepler.html
http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr161/lect/history/velocity.html
http://www.phys.virginia.edu/classes/109N/more_stuff/Applets/ProjectileMotion/jarapplet.html
http://www.ac.wwu.edu/~vawter/PhysicsNet/Topics/Vectors/VectorProducts.html
http://mathforum.org/~klotz/Vectors/
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Excel software for drawing graphs in the lab.
Word office for writing reports.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats
in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
1 classroom with the capacity of maximum 25 students is required. (available).
1 laboratory with the capacity of maximum 12 students is required (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
The classroom is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
The laboratory is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for both classroom and laboratory.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a
sample of assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of maximum three faculty members are assigned for each subject to review the checking of the first, second and final exams.
An internal revision report is written by the committee for each course.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
Signature: Date Report Completed: 12/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Al-harbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 919 General Physics 2 4 PHYS 201
MATH 919 Calculus 2 2 MATH 201
PHYS 922 Classical Mechanics 2 PHYS 201
MATH 201
PHYS 922 Waves and Vibrations 2 PHYS 201
MATH 201
PHYS 942 Thermodynamics 2 PHYS 201
PHYS 922 Thermal Physics Lab 9 PHYS 201
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 13/6/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Physics 2 // Phys 202
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics Program
(B.Sc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ibrahim Shaarany
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 4th Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): General Physics 1
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The other 25% is conducted in the laboratory.
B Objectives
x
x 20
80
What is the main purpose for this course? On completion successful students will be able to:
Understand Electric Charge, Insulators and conductors, Coulomb's law, Point charge, The electric field.
Calculate the Electric field of multiple point charges, The electric field of continuous charge distribution, examples of various shapes (disks, rings, spheres, planes).
Understand The parallel plate capacitor, Electric dipole, motion of point charge and electric dipole in electric field, Electric flux, Gauss's law,
Apply Gauss's law. Understand Conductor in electrostatic equilibrium, The electric current, Batteries,
current density, Conductivity and resistivity, Electric potential. Calculate the potential of point charges at a point. Understand the potential of dipole, The electric potential of many charges, Capacitance
and capacitors, Energy stored in a capacitor, Understand fundamental circuits, Ohm's law, Series resistors, Parallel resistors,
Kirchhoff's laws, RC circuits. Understand magnetism and magnetic force, source of magnetic fields, Magnetic field of
current, Magnetic dipoles, Ampere's law and solenoids. Calculate the magnetic force on a moving charge, the magnetic force on a current-
carrying wire, Forces and torques on current loops, Induced current, Motional EMF, Magnetic flux.
Apply Lenz's law, Faraday's law, Induced fields and EM waves. Understand inductors, LC circuits, LR circuits, AC circuits and phasor, Capacitors in AC
circuits, RC filter circuits, Inductor circuits, The RLC circuits, Power in AC circuits. Understand Wave phenomena, Longitudinal and transverse waves, Sound, The nature of
light and the laws of geometric optics, Image formation, Interference of light waves, Diffraction patterns and polarization.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
5. Update the content periodically.
6. Using new references.
7. Using web references.
8. increase use of IT
9. increase use of video material
10. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
11. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l of
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l ho
urs
Lect
ure
Tuto
rial
s
Lab
Inte
rne
t
Lib
rary
Ho
me
wo
rk
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Electric Charge, Insulators and
conductors, Coulomb's law, Point
charge, The electric field, Electric
field of multiple point charges,
The electric field of continuous
charge distribution, examples of
various shapes (disks, rings,
spheres, planes), The parallel
plate capacitor, Electric dipole,
motion of point charge and
electric dipole in electric field.
6 - 4 10 2 3 3 2 16
Electric flux, Gauss's law,
Applications of Gauss's law,
Conductor in electrostatic
equilibrium, The electric current,
Batteries, current density,
Conductivity and resistivity,
Electric potential, The potential
of point charges, The potential of
dipole, The electric potential of
many charges, Capacitance and
capacitors, Energy stored in a
capacitor.
6 - 4 10 2 3 3 2 16
Fundamental circuits, Ohm's law,
Series resistors, Parallel resistors,
Kirchhoff's laws, RC circuits.
3 - 2 5 2 3 3 2
Mid-term 1 - - - -
Magnetism and magnetic force,
source of magnetic fields,
Magnetic field of a current,
Magnetic dipoles, Ampere's law
6 - 2 10 2 3 3 2 16
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact Hours 45 24 101 170
Credit 3 1 4
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
and solenoids
Magnetic flux, Lenz's law,
Faraday's law, Induced fields and
EM waves, Inductors, LC circuits,
LR circuits, AC circuits and
phasor, Capacitors in AC circuits,
RC filter circuits, Inductor circuits,
The RLC circuits, Power in AC
circuits
6 2 8 2 3 3 2
The magnetic force on a moving
charge, The magnetic force on a
current-carrying wire, Forces and
torques on current loops,
Induced current, Motional emf
3 - 2 5 2 3 3 2 17
Mid-term 2 - - -
Wave phenomena, Longitudinal
and transverse waves, Sound 6 - 2 8 2 4 3 3 21
The nature of light and the laws
of geometric optics, Image
formation
3 - 2 5 2 3 3 3 14
Interference of light waves,
Diffraction patterns and
polarization.
6 - - 6 3 3 3 4 19
Final Exam - - 2
Total 45 - - 24 18 25 32 25 170
6
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with
Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Remember Coulomb's law, Continuous charge
distributions, linear, on surface and in volume. Developing basic communicative
Ability through short and varied situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Study and represent Field lines and flux, Gauss's
law and its applications
1.3
1.4
1.5 Understand. and know the magnetic properties of
matter
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
Apply Gauss law to calculate electric field and
potential for charge distributions for high
symmetry.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting with the instructor (encouraging students to discuss different topics outside the classroom)
Class
Participation
Presentation
Essay Question Research
2.2 Calculate the magnetic force on a moving charge in
a uniform magnetic field.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with students
Making students aware about time management in completing their
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class participation.
Helping other
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
assignments and projects.
Counsel students how to make a good presentation in English.
Encourage students to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
students to understand tasks in the class.
Giving clear and logical arguments
Performing seriously on midterms and final exams
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers.
Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Perform an experiment to verify the general law of
lenses and mirrors.
1. Cooperative learning. 2. Exploring Learning
3. Laboratory Learning 4. Computer Aided Learning
1. Final practical
exams.
2. Evaluation of
lab reports.
5.2 Perform an experiment to estimate the
capacitance of a capacitor
5. Cooperative learning. 6. Exploring Learning 7. Laboratory Learning 8. Computer Aided Learning
1. Final practical
exams.
2. Evaluation of
lab reports.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The knowledge of the basics
Electricity.
Remember Coulomb's law, and definite
Continuous charge distributions, linear, on
surface and in volume.
8,9,10 2,3 b,
Apply Gauss law to calculate electric field
and potential. 3,6,7 1,3,6
c,e, h
Remember Coulomb s law 2,4 3 C, h
Calculate potential energy of charge
distributions. 7,8 6,7 H,f
The knowledge of the basics
magnetism.
Derive Laws for magnetism
Understanding the magnetic properties of
matter 8,9 6,8 g
Applying Ampère law 6,7 9 h
Differentiate between magnetic and
electric field 10, 14 11 g,h
The development of students'
mental and practical abilities.
Present a short report in a written form
and orally using appropriate scientific
language.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Contributing to group discussion j (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
Perform experiments independently with
self-reliance.
j (1, 3, 4,
5) 12, 13 P
Using of communications technology to
communicate with instructors and peers K (1 ,2, 3) 14 g
Using of software programs in solving
problems and view simulations. K (1 ,2, 3) 14 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam 14 20%
4 Presentation One/ semester
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three or for time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and
presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Physics for scientists and engineers; Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett; Cengage Learning; 9th
edition; (2013).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
College Physics; Raymond A. Serway and Chris Vuille; Cengage Learning; 9th edition; (2011).
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Physics; John D. Cutnell and Kenneth W. Johnson; John Wiley & Sons; 9th edition; (2012).
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://www.wolfram.com
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/ishaarany
http://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulations/category/physics
Webphysics.davidson.edu/physlet_resources/bu_semester1/index.html
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations
and software.
Excel software for drawing graphs in the lab.
Word office for writing reports.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats
in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer, General Physics Lab.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
4. Course report. 5. Program report. 6. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a
sample of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course should
be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study. Development
could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
6- Course Evaluation 7- Exam Evaluation 8- Improvement plan 9- Program Outlearning with course outlearning 10- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______Dr Ibrahim Shaarany_________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: _____________
Received by: _____Dr. Thamir Alharbi________ Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Classical Mechanics // Phys 211
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.S) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Sajad Hussain
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 4th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 201 + Math 201
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course?
1. To apply the familiar techniques, based on Newtons laws, to systems in a variety of
coordinate systems and references frames
2. To develop the Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations of mechanics which are
important in the study of quantum mechanics
3. To develop an understanding of classical mechanics and to develop your math skills as
applied to physics.
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the
field)
1. Update the content periodically.
2. Using new references.
3. Using web references.
4. increase use of IT
5. increase use of video material
6. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
7. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Introduction to course
Laws of newton 3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Fundamental concepts of vectors, Newtonian mechanics and
oscillations
6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
General motion of particle in three dimentions
6 - - 6 3 3 4 2 18
Non Interial reference systems 6 - - 6 4 2 3 3 18
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Langrangian and Hamiltonian
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Gravitation and Central forces
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 23 21 21 15 128
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact Hours 42 86 128
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
1. A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
2. A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge
or skill;
3. The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes
in the domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Write Newtonian laws of motion and frame of
references to measure the quantities Developing basic
communicative
Newtonian laws
mathematically.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Assignments
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Describe the Laws of Conservation
1.3 Define hamiltonian principle and describe the
langrangian equation
1.4 Different techniques to solve problem related to
gravitation and central forces
1.5 Define oscillation and solve for linear and nonlinear oscillations
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Ability to think, understand and solve out problem
a) Identification and
solution of problems by
the students
b)Assignments for Solving
the mathematical problems
and discussion to take
advantage of mistakes c) Individual meeting
with the instructor
Class Participation
Presentation Evaluation of the given
tasks and give marks Unseen problem to be
solved
2.2 Use of different formula and mathematical
technique to solve the problems
2.3 Applications of acquired knowledge in practical life
5 hours
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management. Discussion with
students
Involve and encourage
all students to
participate
independently
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1
Students will be able to ask questions during the
lecture and will be fully confident to solve the
problems related to Newtonian mechanics
Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended. Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
To understand basic
knowledge of the Newton’s
laws
List of laws of Newton their derivation. 1, 2 1 a, b
Describe the examples of Newtons laws of
motion 8,9 2,3 b,
Newtons laws in daily life 3,4 1,3
c, h
Memorize mathematical solutions of these
laws 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the mathematical
techniques to solve
langrangian equations.
Collect general information about some
about some techniques. 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the techniques to solve the problems 8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for langrangian equations.
14,17 13 I
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Classical Mechanics by Goldstein Poole and safko, 2002
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Classical Dynamics of Particles and systems by Jerry B. Marion & Stephen T. Thornton
2004
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1. Classical Mechanics, Tai L. Chow, CRC press, 2nd
Ed. 2013
2. Classical Mechanics; John R. Taylor; University Science Books, 2005
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://www.physicsclassroom.com/calcpad/newtlaws/
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Office micro soft
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. Smartboard
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University and questionary after
completion course work
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
7. Course report.
8. Program report.
9. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 11- Course Evaluation
12- Exam Evaluation
13- Improvement plan
14- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
15- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ________Sajad Hussain _(Ph.D)____________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ___12-04-2014____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: vibration and wave I // Phys 231
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Taleb Maslamani
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 5th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 101 & Math 101 7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
2. What is the main purpose for this course?
The study of periodic motion
1- Simple harmonic oscillation , Damped oscillation –forced oscillation
2-Application of damped and forced oscillations
3-Superposition of simple harmonic oscillation – traveling waves , standing , beats.
4-Application of longitudinal wave in open and closed air columns
5-Fourier analysis –Doppler effect
*
* 20
100
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
12. Update the content periodically.
13. Using new references.
14. Using web references.
15. increase use of IT
16. increase use of video material
17. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
18. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should
be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours T
ota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Simple harmonic oscillation , Damped
oscillation –forced oscillation
9 - - 9 6 3 3 2 18
Application of damped and forced
oscillations
9 - - 9 6 3 3 2 18
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Superposition of simple harmonic oscillation –
traveling waves , standing , beats 9 - - 9 6 3 3 2 18
Application of longitudinal wave in open
and closed air columns
9 - - 9 6 3 3 2 18
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Fourier analysis –Doppler effect 9 - - 9 6 3 3 4 18
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 45 - - 48 30 15 15 19 191
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 45 75 291
Credit 3 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Demonstrate an understanding of the basic laws of simple harmonic oscillation Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Calculate acceleration of simple harmonic oscillation
1.3 Demonstrate an understanding of Damping Oscillation
1.4 Demonstrate an understanding of electromagnetic waves.
1.5 Demonstrate and understanding the laws of Superposition of simple harmonic oscillation
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about Electric and
Magnetic Fields.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
6
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
1- The study of
Simple
harmonic
oscillation ,
The student knowledge of the simple
harmonic oscillations
1, 2 1 a, b
Learning the fundamental concepts in all
physics applied and theoretical 8,9 2,3 b,
Distinguish between S.H oscillation and
Damped oscillation 3,4 1,3
c, h
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Memorize different technique used in 2,4 3 C, h
Lear n the,
Collect general information about about
related topics. 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools to solve the spectra
problems
8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for motion Force 14,17 13 i
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
1- Vibrations and waves , George C.King ,-2009 ,Uk
2- Raymond A. Serway and Chris Vuille , Cengage Learning , 9th
Edition , (2011)
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1-Vibrations and waves , George C.King ,-2009 ,Uk
2-The physics of vibrations and waves , H.J.Pain , 6th
Edition ,UK .
3- Raymond A .Serway and Chris Vuille , Cengage Learning , 9th
Edition , (2011)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1-
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/t.maslamani
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
microsoft Office,
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
1. Course report.
2. Program report.
3. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 1- Course Evaluation
2- Exam Evaluation
3- Improvement plan
4- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
5- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr: Taleb Maslamani
___________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ___12/ 4/ 2014
_________________
Received by: _Dr: Thamer Al –harbi ____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _____4-2014 __________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: thermodanamics // Phys 241
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 3rd
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 201
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
3. What is the main purpose for this course?
The study thermodynamics has played a major role in the development of physics and in the
development of our understanding of the structures of matter as it is encountered in everyday
life. The course outline as:
1. System definition with thermodynamics properties
2. Heat transfer in thermodynamics systems
3. Pure substance properties
4. Thermodynamics cycles
x
x 20
80
4. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
5. Giving class lectures to summarize course content.
6. Solving problems and examples.
7. Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered. Solving the
monthly tests and discussion to take advantage of mistakes. 8. Update the content periodically.
9. Using new references.
10. Using web references.
11. increase use of IT
12. increase use of video material
13. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
14. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours T
ota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
CHAPTER 1: Thermodynamics concepts and
terminology, systems, properties, state, changing the
state of a system, units systems, property units,
converting units, problem solving in thermodynamics.
3 - - 3 0.5 0.5 1 0.5 5.5
CHAPTER 2: Energy, work, and heat transfer, energy
within system boundary, energy transfer.CHAPTER
3: Thermodynamics properties of pure substances,
state principle, intensive and extensive properties,
pure substances, liquid-vapour tables, saturation and
quality, compressed liquids, superheated vapour,
gases, ideal gas law,……other thermodynamics
properties
6 - - 6 3 0.5 2 0.5 12
- - - 2 - 2
CHAPTER 4: First law of thermodynamics, closed
system, open system, steady state and flow processes,
transient.
6 - - 6 1 1 2 0.5 10.5
CHAPTER 5: Reversible and irreversible processes,
irreversible processes, the effect of friction, the effect
of a finite temperature….. CHAPTER 6: Entorpy and
the second law, Entropy, the a second law of
thermodynamics, calculating values for entropy,…..
6 - - 6 1 0.5 1.5 2 11
- - - 2 2
CHAPTER 7: Second law of thermodynamics ,
applying the second law to general thermodynamics,
application to specific devices,
9 - - 9 2 1 2 1 12
CHAPTER 8: Analysis of thermodynamics cycles,
first and second laws for cycles, power 9 - - 9 2.5 2 2 2.5 18
cycles, refrigeration and heat pump cycles, and
second law statements revisited. 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
. - - - 2 2
42 - - 48 12 7.5 12.5 9 86
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 44 86
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 System definition with thermodynamics
properties Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Heat transfer in thermodynamics systems
1.3 Pure substance properties
1.4 Thermodynamics cycles
1.5 System definition with thermodynamics
2.9
properties
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information to the related topics. Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical equations and related work to
be use for the universe understanding.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester 20%
5 Homework Every week
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The student knowledge of the
basics of science
thermodynamics
THE STUDENT LEARN systems,
properties, state, changing the state of a
system, units systems, property units,
converting units, problem solving in
thermodynamics.
1, 2 1 a, b
The student will know the energy within
system boundary, energy transfer. 8,9 2,3 b,
state principle, intensive and extensive
properties, pure substances, liquid-vapour
tables, saturation and quality, compressed
liquids, superheated vapour, gases, ideal gas
law,……other thermodynamics properties
3,4 1,3
c, h
The student will have knowledge of closed
system, open system, steady state and flow
processes, transient. 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic
thermodynamics concepts and
principles,
The student will learn the effect of friction,
the effect of a finite temperature….. 7 6,7 H,f
Entropy will be studied to deal with the
universe equations 8,9 8 g
Second law of thermodynamics 6,7 9 h
Thermodynamics cycles will be studied
first and second laws for cycles, power
cycles, refrigeration and heat pump cycles,
and second law statements revisited.
10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Interactive graphics for the subject are
presented to show the system and processes
in action 12,18 10,12 J,k
Interactive graphics for the subject are
presented to show the system and processes
in action 14,17 13 i
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1- Thermodynamics, Philip S. Schmidt, Ofodike A. Ezekoye, John R.Howell
and Derek K. Baker 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
2-Thermodyanamics, kinetic theory, and statistical thermodynamics, 3rd
edition. F.W.Sears and..G.L.Salinger 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Software are available with the lecturer
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
10. Course report.
11. Program report.
12. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 16- Course Evaluation
17- Exam Evaluation
18- Improvement plan
19- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
20- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb____________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Thermal Physics Lab // Phys 291
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Sajad Hussain
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 4th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 201 7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course?
4. To develop the practical skills
5. To study the law of conservation of heat and energy
6. To study about the fluid dynamics
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
19. Update the content periodically.
20. Using new references.
21. Using web references.
22. increase use of IT
23. increase use of video material
24. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
introduction to course and how to work in lab
3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Fluid dynamics, viscosity and how to measure it,
Surface tension
6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Archimedes Principle, Buoyancy force as function of depth in
different liquids
6 - - 6 3 3 4 2 18
Boyles law 6 - - 6 4 2 3 3 18
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Specific heat of solids
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Heat to energy conversion
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 23 21 21 15 128
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 86 128
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Describe the fluid dynamics and how to measure
the surface tension Developing basic
practical skills
Theoretical
explanation
Practical
performance
Team work
Lab performance.
Fill tables and draw
graphs
Group performance
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Archimedes principle and buoyance force as
function of depth 1.3 Boyles law and Specific heat of solids 1.4 Law of conversion of heat
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Ability to think, understand and solve out problem
a) Practical performance
b)different liquids and
solids for measuring
different parameters c) Attention to
individual student with
the teacher
Group performance
Independent
performance Evaluation of the given
practical
2.2 Practical performance of practical’s
2.3 Practical applications of performed practical’s
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Group performance and achieving the target
step by step.
Discussion with
students
Involve and encourage
all students to
participate
independently
Check the time of
task
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to 3.2 Learn how to perform practicals through web
5 hours
3.3 Performance of given task
Encourage students
to help each other
Group task
Group assignments
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1
Students will be able to ask questions during the
lecture and will be fully confident to solve the
problems related to Newtonian mechanics
Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended. Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
To understand basic
knowledge of the Newton’s
laws
List of laws of Newton their derivation. 1, 2 1 a, b
Describe the examples of Newtons laws of
motion 8,9 2,3 b,
Newtons laws in daily life 3,4 1,3
c, h
Memorize mathematical solutions of these
laws 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the mathematical
techniques to solve
langrangian equations.
Collect general information about some
about some techniques. 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the techniques to solve the problems 8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Classical Mechanics by Goldstein Poole and safko, 2002 Classical Dynamics of Particles and systems by Jerry B. Marion & Stephen T. Thornton 2004
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for langrangian equations.
14,17 13 i
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1. Classical Mechanics, Tai L. Chow, CRC press, 2nd
Ed. 2013
2. Classical Mechanics; John R. Taylor; University Science Books, 2005,
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Smart board
http://www.physicsclassroom.com/calcpad/newtlaws/
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Office micro soft
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University and questionary after
completion course work 2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
13. Course report.
14. Program report.
15. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 21- Course Evaluation
22- Exam Evaluation
23- Improvement plan
24- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
25- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ________Sajad Hussain _(Ph.D)____________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ___12-04-2014____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 301 Mathematical Physics 1 3 MATH 202
MATH 310 Differential Equations 3 MATH 202
PHYS 321 Electromagnetism 1 3 PHYS 202
PHYS 332 Optics 3 PHYS 231
MATH 294 Partial Differential
Equations 3 MATH 310 Co-current
PHYS 351 Modern Physics 3 PHYS 231
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 20-4-2014 (20/6/1435)
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Mathematical Methods of Physics // PHYS 301
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs):
BS-Physics, 4 Years Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 5th Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): MATH 202
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Department of Physics, Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
5. What is the main purpose for this course?
a) Aim of this course is to provide a base to students for his future research and study
planning.
b) After successful completion of this course student will be able to understand Fundamentals
of Mathematical Methods of Physics and some basics way of its application.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
25. Update the content periodically with reference new development .
26. Using new Book and Journals References.
27. Using Web References.
28. Increase use of IT.
29. Increase use of Video Materials/Animation materials.
30. Introduction of open source specialized software for theoretical work.
31. Proper and increase use of multimedia in class.
x
x 20
80
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Home
Work
Discuss-
ions
Determinants, Matrices,
Solving linear equations and
differential equations by
matrices,
6 - - 6 4 2 4 2 18
Application on the motion of
the rotation of the rigid body, 6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 2
Vector Algebra: Vector
products, Position,
Displacement, Vector
transformation,
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Gradient, The Divergence, The
Curl, Laplace operator 6 - - 6 2 2 4 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
Line, Surface, and Volume
Integrals, Gauss theorem,
Stock's theorem, Green's
theorem,
9 - - 9 6 4 6 2 27
Spherical polar coordinates,
Cylindrical coordinates, The
Dirac delta function.
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 3 9
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 21 22 24 17 132
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Fundamental Concepts of Determinants, Matrices
Vector Algebra. Developing basic
communicative
Ability through short
and varied situated
discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exams
Terminal Exam. (Final
Exam)
1.2 Gradient, The Divergence, The Curl, Laplace
operator
1.3 Line, Surface, and Volume Integrals
1.4 Gauss theorem, Stock's theorem, Green's
theorem
1.5 Spherical polar coordinates, Cylindrical
coordinates, The Dirac delta function.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Can conduct general literature survey on particular
topic of under study.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging students
to discuss different
topics outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Can correlate and understanding the problem
solving techniques
2.3 Able to know some available simulation software
for any future research work.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students how
to make a good
presentation .
Encourage students to
help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other students
to understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through library
and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Mathematical Methods
5:15 hours
4.1 Take part in discussion with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Interpret/operate differential equations, integrations,
and Matrix that often come lectures.
4.3
Rise to the point questions during the lecture, work
in groups, and communicate with class fellows and
with me electronically, and periodically visit the
web sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the
classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
The student knowledge of the
basics of Mathematical
Methods of Physics.
Easily understand about the Matrix and Determinants
1, 2 1 a, b
Check and apply the different properties of
Matrix. 8,9 2,3 b,
Use the Gauss elimination , Cremer rules
for the solving of Matrix 3,4 1,3 c, h
Understand different techniques use for the
determination variables in liner eqautions. 2,4 3 C, h
Learn, understand and get
concepts of Vector algebra.
Collect general information about some
Vector algebra with respect to some related
topics.
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical tools to
solve the linear equations problems 8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 Gh
The development of students'
intellectual abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally on given topics. 12,18 10,12 J,k
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
*First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week for Student Academic Counseling and Support
/,
1. List Required Textbooks
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszing, John Wiely and Sons, 1988
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1. Introduction to Electrodynamics by David J. Griffiths, 3rd ed, 1999, Prentice Hall. 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
en.wikipedia.org
http:// faculty/aabdulmjid.edu.sa
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
MATHEMATICA,
Understand Line, Surface, and Volume
Integrals, Gauss theorem, Stock's
theorem, Green's theorem and their applications
14,17 13 I
MATLAB,
MathCAD
MS Office (particularly MS Excel)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Furnished Lecture Room equipped with smart board and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computational Lab with proper software
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi Internet Connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course/module evaluation system electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
department has its own teacher evaluation committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Mechanism is available for verification of Standards by
Course committee for each course/Module
Course Committee Check each results and student answer sheet
Course file maintained by teacher along with highest, middle and lowest grade student’s answer
sheets
Periodically improvement in course content with insertion the latest developments in the field
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
26- Course Evaluation
27- Exam Evaluation
28- Improvement plan
29- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
30- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______ Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed____________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __April 22, 2014_____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: ___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution Faculty of Science Date of Report 4/5/1434
College/Department Mathematics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Differential equations for physics, MATH 310
2. Credit hours 4(3+1) Hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course Abd El-Nasser Ghareeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered Third level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) Basics of Mathematics, MAT 201_z
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus Main Campus , Zulfi city
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
6. What is the main purpose for this course? Study of main concepts of differential equations as
follows:
1- Differential equations, its order and degree. 2- How to solve the first order differential equations by different methods. 3- Linear, exact, homogeneous, Bernolli, Ricataau and Claiarot differential
equations, Cauchy-Euler equations. 4- Linear differential equations of higher order. 5- Power series solutions. 6- Laplace transformation, its properties. 7- How to use it to solve differential equations.
√
√
60
40
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1-Cooprate with other educational institutions to find how they deal with the subject.
2- Re- new the course references frequently.
3-Frequently check the latest discovery in science to improve the course objectives.
5- Posting some course material on the websites to help the students.
6- Focusing on generic skills.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
Topics to be cover
List of Topic
No. of
Weeks
Contact hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
Self- Study Discu
ssion
s
tota
l
Lec
ture
tuto
rial
s
Lab
Off
ice
Ho
urs
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Basic definitions and construction of
an ordinary differential equation. 2 6 2 0 1 9 2 4 8 23
Methods of Solving Ordinary
differential equations of First Order. 3 9 3 0 1 14 1 10 10 35
Orthogonal trajectories. 1 3 1 0 1 4 2 2 3 11
First Mid Term Exam
Ordinary differential Equations of
High Orders With constant coefficient
and with variable coefficients.
3 9 3 0 1 14 1 10 10 35
Types of solutions. Linear systems of
ordinary differential equations 1 3 1 0 1 4 2 2 3 11
Series solutions of a Linear ordinary
differential equation of Second Order
with Polynomial coefficient.
2 6 2 0 1 9 2 4 8 23
Second Mid Term Exam
Laplace Transform 2 6 2 0 1 9 2 4 8 23
Final Exam
Total 14 4
2
1
4 7 63 12 63 50 161
Note: one credit hour is equal 25 – 30 load work
hour
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact Hours Self-Study Other Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
3 42 14 125 161
7. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
8. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Define the differential equations and its order and
degree.
Start each chapter by
general idea and the
benefit of it.
Demonstrate the course
information and principles
through lectures.
Exams
Midterms
Final examination.
1.2 Outline linear, exact, homogeneous, Bernolli,
Ricataau and Claiarot differential equations and
Cauchy-Euler equations.
Provide main ways to deal
with the exercises.
Home work.
State Linear differential equations of higher order,
power series solutions and Laplace transformation
and its properties..
Solve some examples
during the lecture.
Continuous discussions
with the students during the
lectures.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 The students will explain and interpret a general
knowledge of differential equations.
Encourage the student to
look for some complicated
problems in the different
references.
Midterm exams
Quizzes.
2.2 Enable students to analyses the mathematical
problems.
Ask the student to attend
lectures for practice
solving problem.
Doing homework.
Check the problems
solution.
Student's ability to write physical equations in a
correct mathematical way.
Homework assignments. Discussion of how to
simplify or analyses some
problems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 The student should illustrate how take up
responsibility.
Ask the students to search
the internet and use the
library.
Encourage them how to
attend lectures regularly
by assigning marks for
Quizzes of some previous
lectures.
Ask the absent students
about last lecture.
3 Hours
attendance.
3.2 Must be shown the ability of working
independently and with groups.
Teach them how to cover
missed lectures.
Give students tasks of
duties
Discussion during the
lecture.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 The student should illustrate how to
communicating with: Peers, Lecturers and
Community.
Creating working groups
with peers to collectively
prepare: solving problems
and search the internet for
some topics.
Discussing a group work
sheets.
4.2 The student should interpret how to Know the
basic mathematical principles using the internet.
Give the students tasks to
measure their:
mathematical skills,
computational analysis
and problem solving.
Discuses with them the
results of computations
analysis and problem
solutions.
The student should appraise how to Use the
computer skills and library.
Encourage the student to
ask for help if needed.
Give homework's to know
how the student
understands the numerical
skills.
The student should illustrate how to Search the
internet and using software programs to deal with
problems.
Encourage the student to
ask good question to help
solve the problem.
Give them comments on
some resulting numbers.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5.2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assess
ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of
Final
Assessment
1 Midterm 1 5th
week 20 %
2 Midterm 2 15th
week 20%
4 Homework + reports During the
semester
20%
5
Final exam End of
semester
40 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
1- 8-office hours per week in the lecturer schedule.
2- The contact with students by e-mail and website.
E. Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
JAMES C. ROBINSON: An introduction to ordinary differential equations, Cambridge U. Press,
2004.
Eare A. Coddington: An introduction to ordinary differential equations. New Jersey, 1961.
Schaum Outline: Differential Equations, McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Essential References
Earl. D. Rainvillem and Philip E. Bedient : Elementary Differential Equations. 8th edition New
York. 1974
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List):
Same as mention above.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-03-differential-equations-spring-2010/
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations: None
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
-Classroom with capacity of 30-students.
- Library.
2. Computing resources: Not available
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list): None
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching: Student
evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the
Department
The colleagues who teach the same course discuss together to evaluate their teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
- Course report, Program report and Program self-study.
- A tutorial lecture must be added to this course.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking
by an independent member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic
exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of assignments with staff at another
institution)
The instructors of the course are checking together and put a unique process of
evaluation.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course
effectiveness and planning for improvement.
1-The following points may help to get the course effectiveness:
* Student evaluation.
* Course report.
* Program report.
* Program self-study.
2- According to point 1 the plan of improvement should be given
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Abd El-Nasser Ghareeb
Signature: Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _____15-5-2014__________
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 13/6/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: ElectromagnetismI // Phys 321
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ali ZAIDI
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 5th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 202
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course? On completion successful students will be able to:
Review of integral Calculus: (linear, surface, and volume integrals), The fundamental theorem for:
(calculus, gradient, divergence, curl), Curvilinear Coordinates: (spherical polar and cylindrical
coordinates), The Dirac delta function in one and three dimension, The divergence of reciprocal square of
radial distance
Demonstrate an understanding electrostatic such us the electric field and the potential and related
concepts, for stationary charges
Calculate Coulomb forces properties of simple charge distributions using Coulomb's law,
Using Gauss's law to calculate electric field and potential for charge distributions for high symmetry.
Study and know properties of conductors and induced charges, Surface charge and the force on a
conductor, Capacitors, Poisson's equation, Laplace's equation in one, two and three dimensions.
Demonstrate an understanding of the magnetic field for steady currents and moving charges.
Calculate magnetic properties of simple current distributions using Biot-Savart and Ampère's laws.
Demonstrate an understanding of electromagnetic induction and related concepts, making calculations
using Faraday and Lenz's laws. Study the magnetic field inside matter and the auxiliary field, Ampere's law in magnetized materials,
Boundary Conditions, Linear and nonlinear media, Magnetic susceptibility and permeability,
Ferromagnetism.
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1. Update the content periodically.
2. Using new references.
3. Using web references.
4. increase use of IT
5. increase use of video material
6. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
7. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should
be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
I-Review of vector Operations and algebra, Linear
and rotational transformation of vectors, Vector
field, Review of vector differential calculus:
(gradient, the divergence, the curl, product rules,
Second Derivatives,)
6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Review of integral Calculus: (linear, surface, and
volume integrals), The fundamental theorem for:
(calculus, gradient, divergence, curl), Curvilinear
Coordinates: (spherical polar and cylindrical
coordinates), The Dirac delta function in one and
three dimension, The divergence of reciprocal
square of radial distance, The Helmholtz theorem
hrödinger equation in three dimensions, the
fundamental postulates of quantum mechanics.
6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Coulomb's law, The electric field, Continuous
charge distributions, Divergence and curl of
electrostatic fields, Field lines and flux, Gauss's
law and its applications, Electric potential, The
potential of a localized charge distribution, The
work done to move a charge, The energy of a
point charge distribution, The energy of a
continuous charge distribution
6 -
- 6 2 3 3 3 17
Properties of conductors and induced charges,
Surface charge and the force on a conductor,
Capacitors, Poisson's equation, Laplace's equation
in one, two and three dimensions, Boundary
conditions and uniqueness theorems, Conductors
and the second uniqueness theorem, The Method
of images and induced surface charge and
calculating force and energy, Multipole expansion
and approximate potentials at large distances, The
monopole and dipole terms-
6 - - 6 2 3 3 3 17
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
-The electric field of a dipole, Polarization, Field
of a polarized object, Induced dipole and
dielectrics, Polar molecules, Bound charges, The
field inside a dielectric and the electric
displacement, Gauss's law in the presence of
dielectrics, Boundary conditions, Linear
Dielectrics: (susceptibility, permittivity, dielectric
constant), Boundary value problems with linear
dielectrics, Force and energy in dielectric systems
9 - - 9 2 4 3 3 21
-Magnetostatics and the Lorentz law , Magnetic
fields and magnetic forces, The Biot-Savart law,
The magnetic field of a steady current, The
divergence and curl of the magnetic field,
Ampere's law and its applications, Magnetic
vector potential, Magnetostatic boundary
conditions, Multipole expansion of the vector
potential, Magnetic fields in matter and the
magnetization, Magnetic materials: (diamagnetic,
paramagnetic, ferromagnetic),
3 - - 3 2 3 3 3 14
Torques and forces on magnetic dipoles, Effect of
magnetic field on atomic orbits, The field of a
magnetized object, Bound currents, The magnetic
field inside matter and the auxiliary field,
Ampere's law in magnetized materials, Boundary
Conditions, Linear and nonlinear media, Magnetic
susceptibility and permeability, Ferromagnetism
6 - - 6 3 3 3 4 19
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 15 22 21 20 125
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 83 125
Credit 1 2 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
4. A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
5. A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or
skill;
6. The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Recall Operations and algebra, Linear and
rotational transformation of vectors, Vector
field, Review of vector differential calculus:
(gradient, the divergence, the curl, product
rules, Second Derivatives,)
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Remember Coulomb's law, Continuous charge
distributions ,linear, on surface and in volume.
1.3 , Study and represent Field lines and flux,
Gauss's law and its applications
1.4
Apply Gauss law to calculate electric field and
potential for charge distributions for high
symmetry.
1.5 Understand. and know the conductors
properties and induced charges
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
-Understand the need for Electromagnetism in
physics:
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding ElectromagnetismI.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
1.5
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
English.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
Suggested Guidelines for Learning Outcome Verb, Assessment, and Teaching
NQF Learning Domains Suggested Verbs
Knowledge
list, name, record, define, label, outline, state, describe, recall, memorize,
reproduce, recognize, record, tell, write
Cognitive Skills
estimate, explain, summarize, write, compare, contrast, diagram,
subdivide, differentiate, criticize, calculate, analyze, compose, develop,
create, prepare, reconstruct, reorganize, summarize, explain, predict,
justify, rate, evaluate, plan, design, measure, judge, justify, interpret,
appraise
Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility demonstrate, judge, choose, illustrate, modify, show, use, appraise,
evaluate, justify, analyze, question, and write
Communication, Information
Technology, Numerical
demonstrate, calculate, illustrate, interpret, research, question, operate,
appraise, evaluate, assess, and criticize
Psychomotor
demonstrate, show, illustrate, perform, dramatize, employ, manipulate,
operate, prepare, produce, draw, diagram, examine, construct, assemble,
experiment, and reconstruct
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester 20%
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The student knowledge of the
basics of Electromagnetism I.
calculate gradient, the divergence, the
curl, product rules, Second Derivatives,) 1, 2 1,3 a, b,c
Remember Coulomb's law, and definite
Continuous charge distributions ,linear,
on surface and in volume .
8,9,10 2,3 b,
Apply Gauss law to calculate electric
field and potential . 3,,6,7 1,3,6
c,e, h
Remember Coulomb s law 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic of
Electromagnetism I
Calculate potential energy of charge
distributions. 7,8 6,7 H,f
Know the conductors properties in
equilibrium electrostatics and induced
charges.
8,9 6,8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for Electromagnetism I 14,17 13 i
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three or for time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
4- "Elements of Electromagnetics" by Matthew N. O. Sadiku
5- Introduction to electrodynamics " by David Griffiths
1- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
16. Course report.
17. Program report.
18. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 31- Course Evaluation
32- Exam Evaluation
33- Improvement plan
34- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
35- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Optics // Phys 332
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Khaled Ben Abdessalem
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 5 th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 231
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
6. What is the main purpose for this course?
The student knows the basics of optics required for his life and the decisions of the higher
levels.
To provide students with the nature of light and its spread and measure the speed and the
various phenomena and delve deeper into the science of optics and optical instruments and areas
of use and how to benefit from and emulate
The development of mental abilities of students.
To become a student will be able to resolve the issues applied to optical phenomena and
understand why they occur.
Understand refraction and know Snells law;
Understand the concept and consequences of wave dispersion
Understand the concepts of phase and group velocities and be able to calculate these quantities;
Understand diffraction and interference of waves as well as the importance of relative phase
Be able to analyze the summation of waves from many sources;
Understand the concept of light polarization and polarizer.
X
X 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
32. Update the content periodically.
33. Using new references.
34. Using web references.
35. increase use of IT
36. increase use of video material
37. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
38. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Work
Load
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
The nature of light , The superposition of waves 6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Interference of two-beams of light (division of the wave front & division of amplitude), Interferometers(
Young , Fresnel's biprism , loyed mirror, Fresnel's double
mirrors , wedge interferometer , Newton rings )
6 - - 6 2 1.5 2 3 14.5
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Michelson interferometer , Jamin & Mach-Zehnder refractometers ), Interference of multiple beams ,
Fabry-Perot interferometer , Applications of interferometry .
6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Diffraction , Fraunhofer diffraction (single slit, two slits, multiple slits) - diffraction grating - Fresnel
diffraction (circular aperture & circular Obstacle ). 3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Polarization - polarization by absorption , reflection , refraction & double refraction. Optical active
materials & polarometer .Interference of polarized
light , Analysis of polarized light.
9 - - 9 6 6 6 6 33
Electro-optics (Kerr effect & Pockels effect ) , Magneto- optics ( Faraday effect )
6 - - 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 16
Review 3 - - 3 4 4 4 4.5 19.5
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 21.5 20 20.5 25 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
7. A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
8. A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or
skill;
9. The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Concepts and theories of mathematics and sciences, appropriate optics and waves
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
Principles of design including elements design, process related to diffraction, interference and polarisation.
1.3 Current engineering technologies as related to light
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about some about some
atomic spectra related topics.
Problem solving
Class discussion Class Participation
41
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
Group discussion
Exams
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
The student knowledge of the
basics of optics as
interference, diffraction and
polarisation
List different types of interference and
related instrumentation. 1, 2 1 a, b
Describe theories explaining the diffraction,
interference and polarization 8,9 2,3 b,
Identify the light spectra and it use in the
optical measurement 3,4 1,3
c, h
Memorize different technique used
interferometry and applications. 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic light concepts
and principles, and the basics
of interference and diffraction
with a highlight on its
practical and scientific
significance.
Collect general information about light
spectra topics. 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools to solve the wave
equation of electromagnetic radiation
8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for bright and dark fringe based on wave theories.
14,17 13 i
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
6- An Introduction to modern optics, Ghata and Joy, New yourk:Micro-Hill Book
Company,1972.
7- Optical Interferometry, O Hariharan and F Orlando, Academic press,1985
Geometrical and physical Optics, 2nd ed., New York: John Wiley and Sons,
1967Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6th
edition
8- HANDBOOK OF OPTICS Volume II Devices , Measurements, and Properties
McGRAW-HILL , INC ISBN 0-07-047974-7
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1- Connes, Pierre, How light is analyzed, Scientific American, 1968.
2- Francon Maurice, Optical Interferometry, New Yourk, 1966.
3- Optics, eds. A Tunnacliffe and J Hirst,1981 by Eastern press,London.
4- Physical optics Notebook: Tutorials in Fourier Optics, eds. Reynolds, George, John 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/abdessalem http://www.lightandmatter.com/lm/ http://optics.byu.edu/BYUOpticsBook_2011c.pdf
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Office Microsoft, PowerPoint
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
1. Course report.
2. Program report.
3. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 36- Course Evaluation
37- Exam Evaluation
38- Improvement plan
39- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
40- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. KHALED BEN ABDESSALEM______________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution Faculty of Science Date of Report 4/5/1434
College/Department Mathematics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Partial Differential Equations, Mat 423
2. Credit hours 4 Hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course Omar Hassan Khalil
5. Level/year at which this course is offered The seven level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) Ordinary Differential Equations, Mat 321
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus Main Campus , Zulfi city
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course? Study of main concepts of Partial Differential
Equations as follows:
1. Studying First order linear partial differential equation.
2. Studying Cauchy problem.
3. Solving by using Lagrange’s method.
4. Have the knowledge of Second order linear P.D.E in several variables.
5. Have the knowledge of Physical application using separation of variables.
6. Have the knowledge of Integral transforms (Fourier and Laplace transforms) and there
applications to P.D.E.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1- Cooperate with other educational institutions to find how they deal with the subject.
√
√
10
50
2- Re- new the course references frequently.
3- Frequently check the latest discovery in science to improve the course objectives.
4- The course needs the use of computers.
5- Posting some course material on the websites to help the students.
6- Focusing on generic skills.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
Topics to be cover
List of Topic
No
. o
f W
eek
s Contact hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
Self- Study
Dis
cuss
ion
s
tota
l
Lec
ture
tuto
rial
s
Lab
Off
ice
Ho
urs
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Introduction. 1 3 1 1 5 2 2 1 1 11
First order linear partial differential
equation
2 6 2
2 10 2 4 2 2 20
Solution using Lagrange’s method. 1 3 1 1 5 2 2 1 1 11
Cauchy problem 1 3 1 1 5 2 2 1 1 11
Mid-term 1 1 1 1
Second order linear P.D.E in several
variables
1 3 1
1 5 2 2 1 1 11
Physical application using separation of
variables.
2 6 2
2 10 2 4 2 2 20
Classifications of P.D.E. 2 6 2 2 10 2 4 2 2 20
Mid-term 1 1 1 1
Integral transforms (Fourier and Laplace
transforms) and there applications to
P.D.E
2
6 2
2
10 2 4 2 2 20
Green’s function 2 6 2 2 10 2 4 2 2 20
Review 2 2 4
Final Exam 2 2 2
Total 16 46 14
14 73 18 28 16 16
15
1
Note: one credit hour is equal 25 – 30 load work hour
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact Hours Self-Study Other Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
4 46 14 91 151
2. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
3. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
3 Hours
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Define the fundamental in Partial Differential
Equations such as: Solution using Lagrange’s method.
Start each chapter by
general idea and the
benefit of it.
Demonstrate the course
information and principles
through lectures.
Exams
Midterms
Final examination.
1.2 Outline the logical thinking.
Provide main ways to deal
with the exercises.
Home work.
State the physical problems by mathematical
method.
Solve some examples
during the lecture.
Continuous discussions
with the students during the
lectures.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 The students will explain and interpret a general
knowledge of Partial Differential Equations.
Encourage the student to
look for some complicated
problems in the different
references.
Midterm exams
Quizzes.
2.2 Enable students to analyses the mathematical
problems.
Ask the student to attend
lectures for practice
solving problem.
Doing homework.
Check the problems
solution.
Student's ability to write physical equations in a
correct mathematical way.
Homework assignments. Discussion of how to
simplify or analyses some
problems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 The student should illustrate how take up
responsibility.
Ask the students to search
the internet and use the
library.
Encourage them how to
attend lectures regularly
by assigning marks for
attendance.
Quizzes of some previous
lectures.
Ask the absent students
about last lecture.
3.2 Must be shown the ability of working
independently and with groups.
Teach them how to cover
missed lectures.
Give students tasks of
duties
Discussion during the
lecture.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 The student should illustrate how to
communicating with: Peers, Lecturers and
Creating working groups
with peers to collectively
prepare: solving problems
Discussing a group work
sheets.
Community.
and search the internet for
some topics.
4.2 The student should interpret how to Know the
basic mathematical principles using the internet.
Give the students tasks to
measure their:
mathematical skills,
computational analysis
and problem solving.
Discuses with them the
results of computations
analysis and problem
solutions.
The student should appraise how to Use the
computer skills and library.
Encourage the student to
ask for help if needed.
Give homework's to know
how the student
understands the numerical
skills.
The student should illustrate how to Search the
internet and using software programs to deal with
problems.
Encourage the student to
ask good question to help
solve the problem.
Give them comments on
some resulting numbers.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5.2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assess
ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of
Final
Assessment
1 Midterm 1 5th
week 10 %
2 Midterm 1 10th
week 10%
3 Midterm 1 15th
week 10%
4 Homework + reports During the
semester
10%
5
Final exam End of
semester
60 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
1- 8-office hours per week in the lecturer schedule.
2- The contact with students by e-mail and website.
E. Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
Fourier Analysis and its Applications, Geral B. F Fourier Folland, Pacific Grove, 1992.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.) (Attach List):
Same as mention above.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc.
http://joshua.smcvt.edu
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/okhalil
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations: None
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
-Classroom with capacity of 30-students.
- Library.
2. Computing resources: Not available
3. Other resources (specify --e.g. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list): None
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching: Student
evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the
Department
The colleagues who teach the same course discuss together to evaluate their teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
- Course report, Program report and Program self-study.
- A tutorial lecture must be added to this course.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking
by an independent member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic
exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of assignments with staff at another
institution)
The instructors of the course are checking together and put a unique process of
evaluation.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course
effectiveness and planning for improvement.
1-The following points may help to get the course effectiveness:
* Student evaluation.
* Course report.
* Program report.
* Program self-study.
2- According to point 1 the plan of improvement should be given
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Omar Hassan Khalil
Signature: Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Modern Physics // Phys 351
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 5th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 231
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
7. What is the main purpose for this course?
The course of Modern Physics is devoted to the main results in physics, which were
achieved in the 20-th century. The PHYS-351 (Modern Physics-I) gives a basic
knowledge in special relativity and quantum mechanics of atoms and molecules. The
applications of quantum mechanics to the atoms, molecules and spectroscopy are
discussed.
x
x 20
80
8. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
9. Update the content periodically.
10. Using new references.
11. Using web references.
12. increase use of IT
13. increase use of video material
14. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
Increased use of power-point and projector in class
15. Giving class lectures to summarize course content.
16. Solving problems and examples.
17. Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered. Solving the
monthly tests and discussion to take advantage of mistakes.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours T
ota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
CHAPTER 1: Relativity
3 - - 3 0.5 0.5 1 0.5 5.5
CHAPTER 2: PARTICLE properties of waves 6 - - 6 3 0.5 2 0.5 12
Exam 1 - - - 2 - 2
CHAPTER 3: Wave properties of particles 6 - - 6 1 1 2 0.5 10.5
CHAPTER 4:Atomic Structure
6 - - 6 1 0.5 1.5 2 11
Exam 2 - - - 2 2
CHAPTER 5: Quantum mechanics 9 - - 9 2 1 2 1 12
CHAPTER 6: Quantum Theory of the Hydrogen
Atom 9 - - 9 2.5 2 2 2.5 18
CHAPTER 7 : Many Electron atoms 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
Exam - - - 2 2
42 - - 48 12 7.5 12.5 9 86
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 44 86
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To give main results in the special relativity,
quantum mechanics, and atomic and molecular
spectroscopy
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
To show a connection between quantum
mechanics and some contemporary tasks in
physics
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2
2.3
2.9
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
To improve the critical thinking skills of the
graduate students.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2
3.3
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Relativity and its relation to
the universe
THE STUDENT LEARN the relativity and
relation with universe 1, 2 1 a, b
The student will know the properties of
waves 8,9 2,3 b,
Wave properties of particle will be studied
3,4 1,3
c, h
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
The student will have knowledge of atomic
structure 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic modern
physics concepts and
principles,
The student will learn the basic of quantum
mechanics 7 6,7 H,f
H atoms will be studied to deal with the
atomic stability 8,9 8 g
Many electron atoms will be studied to
deal with atoms having more than two
electrons
6,7 9 h
Elementary particles and basic from heavy
ion collisions 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Using the animation figures , to improve the
mental abilities of students 12,18 10,12 J,k
Using movies in science fiction , to improve
the mental abilities of students 14,17 13 i
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Concepts of Modern Physics ' fifth edition' ' sixth edition' Arthur beiser 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
2- Physics for scientists and engineers with modern physics 3- Introduction to modern physics, richtmyer. Fk
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.) /classical and modern physics =الفيزياء الكالسيكية الحديثة -1
Modern physics for scientists and engineers/ Saunders golden sunburst series,
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
19. Course report.
20. Program report.
21. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 41- Course Evaluation
42- Exam Evaluation
43- Improvement plan
44- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
45- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb____________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 302 Mathematical Physics 2 3 PHYS 301
IC 102 Islam and building
society 2 IC 101
PHYS 393 Optics Lab. 2 PHYS 332
PHYS 342 Statistical Physics 3 PHYS 241
PHYS 392 Electromagnetism Lab. 2 PHYS 321
PHYS 352 Quantum Mechanics 1 3 PHYS 351
MATH 324
PHYS 322 Electromagnetism 2 3 PHYS 321
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 20-4-2014 (20/6/1435)
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Mathematical Methods of Physics // PHYS 302
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs):
BS-Physics
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Khaled Ben Abdessalem
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Optional (6) / 6th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): PHYS 301
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Department of Physics, Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
18. What is the main purpose for this course?
c) to provide a course on mathematical techniques that are used in the physical sciences
courses
d) to prepare students for more advanced mathematical courses in the physics
e) to develop mathematical skills and methods appropriate for students in the physical
sciences. 2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
8. Update the content periodically with reference new development .
9. Using new Book and Journals References.
10. Using Web References.
11. Increase use of Video Materials/Animation materials.
12. Introduction of open source specialized software for theoretical work.
13. Proper and increase use of multimedia in class.
x
x 20
80
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Home
Work
Discuss-
ions
Complex numbers , analytic function
– limits and continuity – analyticity –
the Cauchy –Riemann Equation ,
6 - - 6 4 2 4 2 18
Elementary Function , complex
integration – contours –independence
of path –
6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 2
Cauchy integral theorem –Bounds
for analytic functions 6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Series representations for analytic
functions , Residue theory 6 - - 6 2 2 4 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
Conformal Mapping –invariance
of Laplace Equation – Geometric
considerations –
9 - - 9 6 4 6 2 27
Bilinear Transformations –the
Schwartz-Christofffel
Transformations.
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 3 9
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 21 22 24 17 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 48 84 291
Credit 3 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Complex numbers , analytic function – limits and
continuity – analyticity – the Cauchy –Riemann Equation Developing basic
communicative
Ability through short
and varied situated
discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exams
Terminal Exam. (Final
Exam)
1.2 Elementary Function , complex integration – contours –
independence of path
1.3 Cauchy integral theorem –Bounds for analytic functions
1.4 Series representations for analytic functions , Residue
theory
1.5 Conformal Mapping –invariance of Laplaces Equation –
Geometric considerations –Bilinear Transformations –the
Schwartz-Christofffel Transformations
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Can conduct general literature survey on particular
topic of under study.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging students
to discuss different
topics outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Can correlate and understanding the problem
solving techniques
2.3 Able to know some available simulation software
for any future research work.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students how
to make a good
presentation.
Encourage students to
help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other students
to understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through library
and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
5:15 hours
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Mathematical Methods
4.1 Take part in discussion with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Interpret/operate differential equations, integrations,
and Matrix that often come lectures.
4.3
Rise to the point questions during the lecture, work
in groups, and communicate with class fellows and
with me electronically, and periodically visit the
web sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the
classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
The student knowledge of the
basics of Mathematical
Methods of Physics.
Easily understand about Complex numbers ,
analytic function – limits and continuity –
analyticity – the Cauchy –Riemann Equation 1, 2 1 a, b
Check and apply the different properties of Series representations for analytic functions ,
Residue theory.
8,9 2,3 b,
Use the Elementary Function , complex
integration – contours – Cauchy integral
theorem –Bounds for analytic functions 3,4 1,3 c, h
Understand Conformal Mapping –
invariance of Laplaces Equation –
Geometric considerations –Bilinear
Transformations –the Schwartz-Christofffel
Transformations.
2,4 3 C, h
Learn, understand and get
concepts of complex integral.
Collect general information about complex
integral with respect to some related topics.
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical tools to
solve complex integral problems 8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 Gh
The development of students'
intellectual abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally on given topics. 12,18 10,12 J,k
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
*First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week for Student Academic Counseling and Support
/,
1. List Required Textbooks
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszing, John Wiely and Sons, 1988
3. Mathematical methods in the physical sciences Second edition Marly L .Boas1993
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
en.wikipedia.org
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/kabdessale
Understand Line integral, and series
representations for analytic function and
their applications
14,17 13 I
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
MATHEMATICA,
MATLAB,
MathCAD
MS Office (particularly MS Excel)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Furnished Lecture Room equipped with smart board and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computational Lab with proper software
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi Internet Connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course/module evaluation system electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
department has its own teacher evaluation committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Mechanism is available for verification of Standards by
Course committee for each course/Module
Course Committee Check each results and student answer sheet
Course file maintained by teacher along with highest, middle and lowest grade student’s answer
sheets
Periodically improvement in course content with insertion the latest developments in the field
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
6- Course Evaluation
7- Exam Evaluation
8- Improvement plan
9- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
10- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______ Dr. khaled Ben Abdessalem___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __April 24, 2014_____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: ___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution: Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department: College of Science in AlZulfi/ Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Statistical Physics // PHYS 342
2. Credit hours:3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Undergraduate Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 6th /third year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) Thermodynamics // PHYS 241
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) Not Applicable
8. Location if not on main campus: College of Science in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The course is available via my webpage. The model of instructor is distributed and used two items
above.
√
√
40
60
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course? The course describes the statistical mechanics.
By the end of this course, students are expected to apply:
1. Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics
2. Applications of Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics.
3. Bose-Einstein Statistics.
4. Fermi-Dirac Statistics.
5. Temperature and Entropy.
6. The Thermodynamics of Gases.
7. Statistical Thermodynamics.
8. The Canonical Ensemble.
9. The Grand Canonical Ensemble.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Through coursework and workgroups, students are expected to cultivate the following
attitudes and dispositions:
1. Confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge.
2. Desire for continuous and independent learning.
3. Appreciation for the dynamic role of statistical mechanics in science.
4. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
5. Increased use of IT and web based reference material.
6. Changes in content as a result of new research in the field.
7. Adapting the contents to the level of the students and the number registered in the section.
8. Adapting the course to the students' specialties.
I use information technology to view and illustrate the concepts of physics means.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or
Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
rials
Lab
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics 6 - - 6 4 4 2 3 19
Applications of Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics
3 - - 3 2 2 1 2 10
Bose-Einstein Statistics 6 - - 6 3 4 2 3 18
First Exam - - - 2 - 2
Fermi-Dirac Statistics 3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Temperature and Entropy 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
The Thermodynamics of Gases 5 - - 5 2 3 2 2 14
Statistical Thermodynamics 4 - - 4 1 2 1 1 9
Second Exam - - - 2 2
The Canonical Ensemble 3 - - 3 3 2 3 2 13
The Grand Canonical
Ensemble 3 - - 3 2 2 1 1 9
Review 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 23 25 18 21 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester): 45
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact Hours 39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
1) A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended.
2) A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
3) The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
3
1.1 The student will lean to knowledge of the basic of Statistical Physics.
1. Giving class
lectures to
summarize course
content.
1. Solving problems
and examples.
2. Outlining important
applications and
significance of
topics covered.
3. Solving the monthly
tests and discussion
to take advantage of
mistakes.
1. Homework.
2. Group Discussion
3. Presentation
4. Quizzes.
5. First and second
exams.
6. Final exam.
1.2 By the end of this course, students are expected to apply:
1. Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics
2. Applications of Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics.
3. Bose-Einstein Statistics.
4. Fermi-Dirac Statistics.
5. Temperature and Entropy.
6. The Thermodynamics of Gases.
7. Statistical Thermodynamics.
8. The Canonical Ensemble.
9. The Grand Canonical Ensemble.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Prepare the physics principles to solve basic problem
involving the application of the concepts of statistical
physics.
1) Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered.
2) Problem solving. 3) Class discussion. 4) Project
presentation
1. I always summarize the
previous lesson with a session
questions and answers, to help
them regain and remember
information earlier.
2. I preserve the clarity of voice,
and communicate with students.
3. I help them answer the
questions themselves when they
are face with difficulty. With this,
they learn independence and
logical thinking. I support their
thinking skills through the
development process in dealing
with the basic ideas and facts. I
also support reaching conclusions
on issues and problems solving in
an orderly and sequentially
manner.
4. I try to represent their concepts
in the classroom.
2.2 Summarize all physics principles to link with previous lectures.
2.3 Design a map to get all physics principles to solve problems.
2.4 Subdivide particles to bosons and fermions and appreciate statistics method that it can be used.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Justify to complete assignments in due time. 1. I encourage the student
to attend lectures regularly
by giving bonus marks for
attendance, give students
tasks, and ask questions
about previous lectures.
2. Mutual respect is
between the lecturer and
students and among
3.2 Analyze participations in class discussion and think
critically.
1) Take attendance
2) Class discussions
3) Grade quizzes.
4) Respect deadlines.
5) Give clear and
logical arguments.
6) Show active class
participation.
3.3 Show acting responsibly and ethically in carrying
out individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Evaluate their strengths and weaknesses as
members of a team.
students themselves. I deal
with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
3. I apply educational
standards and behavioral
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit
and good character.
I enable students to
communicate with me
discuss any needs they
have related to the course,
and I welcome students'
comments when they face
challenging problems.
7) Perform serious on
monthly and final
exams.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will be able to communicate with teacher, ask
questions, solve problems, and use computers.
Students solve problems on
the smart board. I giving
them group assignments and
homeworks and encourage
group projects, but I can say
that technology has become
an integral part of their lives,
and use computer programs
to draw and solve
mathematical equations,
derivation and integration
and they feel confident in this
area.
Make some part of
course grade on these
things.
4.2 Students will be able to deal with confidence with
differential equations, integrations, and differentials.
Although this skill is not taught within the course, it is
necessary to deal with him.
4.3 Students ask questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and with me
electronically, and periodically visit the sites I
recommended.
4.4 Students use information technology in the classroom.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Students are expected
to learn about the scope
of statistical physics.
Compare between boson and fermion
particles.
1,12
1,2
a, b, e
Describe classical statistical physics.
10
4,5
b, c, h
Apply Maxwell-Boltzmann statistic to
find the weight of classical gas.
8,10
3,4
f, h, i
Students are expected
to apply Maxwell-
Boltzmann statistics to
find physics properties
of different systems.
Find mean and most probable velocities.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Identify the specific heats of gases.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Apply Equipartition of energy theory to
find energy and specific heat of
diatomic gas.
6,10,21
2
e, k, n
Students are expected
to familiar with
quantum statistics
physics.
Classify particles with quantum statistics.
1, 11, 12
7
d, i
Compare between Bose-Einstein and
Fermi-Dirac Statistics.
10
1,3
o
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet.
12
12
i, m, n,
o
Students will lean to
acknowledge of the
canonical and grand
canonical ensembles.
Evaluation of the grand partition
function.
2
2,3
k, n, o
Classify fluctuations of the assembly
energy in a canonical ensemble.
1, 11
4,5
o
Describe thermodynamic properties of
the canonical ensemble.
13
6, 15
o
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week) Four office hours per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Introduction to statistical physics, A. J. Pointon,2
nd edition, Pergamon press, 1980.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1) Statistical Physics, F. Mandl, John Wiley and Sons, 2000
2) Fundamentals of Statistical & Thermal Phys, F. Reif McGraw-Hill, 1985.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) Statistical Mechanics, R.K. Pathria, 3
ed edition, MPG Books Ltd, 2013.
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://www.damtp.cam.ac.uk/user/tong/statphys.html
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek
http://galileo.phys.virginia.edu/classes/152.mf1i.spring02/HeatIndex.htm
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software: Mathematica Program is used to solve deferential equations, integrals.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab., internet lab and calculator.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list): Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically is organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 4. Course report.
5. Program report.
6. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
11- Course Evaluation.
12- Exam Evaluation.
13- Improvement plan.
14- Program Outlearning with course outlearning.
15- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: Dr. Thamer Alharbi
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: electromagnetism lab // Phys 392 2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Taleb Maslamani
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 6th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): phys 321 7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
Biot – savarts law and Amperes law 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives 1- The training on using Excel & Origin software 2- Verification of Biot – Savart s Law 3- Verification of Faraday's law. 4- Measuring the force acting on current carrying conductors in a homogenous magnetic fields 5- measuring the magnetic field for an air coil 6- Voltage transformation with a transformer under load. 7- Measuring the magnetic field of an air coil and straight conductor. 8- Measuring the induction voltage of a conductor loop in a variable magnetic field. 9- Determination of e/m ratio of an electron.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should
be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
*
* 25
75
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
1*The training on using Excel & Origin software
2-Verification of Biot – Savart s Law - 4 4 2 1 0.5 11.5
3. Verification of Faraday's law.
- 4 4 2 1 0.5 11.5
4--. Measuring the force acting on current carrying conductors in a homogenous magnetic
. - 4 4 2 1 0,5 11.5
5-. measuring the magnetic field for an air coil
- 4 4 2 1 0.5 11.5
6- Voltage transformation with a
transformer under load - 4 4 2 1 0,5 11.5
7-Measuring the magnetic field of an air coil
and straight conductor - 4 4 2 1 0,5 11.5
8-Measuring the induction voltage of a conductor loop in a variable magnetic field.
4 4 2 1 0,5 11.5
9- Determination of e/m ratio of an electron. - 4 4 2 1 0.5 11.5
Final Exam - 4 4 4
Total - 36 36 16 8 4 96
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 36 60 96
Credit 2 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Demonstrate an understanding of the basic laws of electromagnetism ,
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Calculate Electromagnetic for an air coil
1.3 Calculate the force acting on current –carrying conductors in the field of a horseshoe magnet
1.4 Determine the e/m Ratio of an Electron
1.5 Knowledge the voltage and current transformer
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about Electric and
Magnetic Fields .
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Utilize a computer software program , to identify
and develop physical issues problems .
5.2 Use a perfect experimental tools to solve physics
problems
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Apply conceptual understanding of Electromagnetic Field
The student knowledge of magnetic
field 1, 2 1 a, b
Work effectively in groups and exercise
leadership 8,9 2,3 b,
Psychomotor Skills 3,4 1,3
c, h
. 2,4 3 C, h
Measuring the force acting on current carrying conductors in a homogenous magnetic fields
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools 8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Lear n how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam*
2 Second exam*
3 Lab. Exam 15 40
4 Presentation
40
5 Homework
6 quizzes
7 Discussions
8 Team group
9 Tutorials
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 20
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Elements of electromagnetics , Metthew N.O 3rd Edition
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
9- Elements of electromagnetics , Metthew N.O 3rd Edition
10- Physics for scientists and Engineers ., Serway
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
4-
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/tmaslamani
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
. 14,17 13 i
software.
Office micro soft : Excel , Word ,
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
7. Course report.
8. Program report.
9. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 16- Course Evaluation
17- Exam Evaluation
18- Improvement plan
19- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
20- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr: Taleb Maslamani ___________________________________
Signature: _________________ Date Report Completed: __21/ 4/ 2014 _________________
Received by: _Dr: Thamer Al harbi ___________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _____4-2014 __________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 13/6/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Quantum Mechanics I // Phys 352
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Pr. Dr. Mohamed Ali ZAIDI
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 6th
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 351-Math 324
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
x
x 20
80
What is the main purpose for this course?
Quantum mechanics I is a branch of physics which deals with physical phenomena at nano-scopic
scales where the action is on the order of the Planck constant. It departs from classical mechanics
primarily at the quantum realm of atomic and subatomic length scales. Quantum mechanics
provides a mathematical description of much of the dual particle-like and wave-like behavior and
interactions of energy and matter. Quantum mechanics provides a substantially useful framework
for many features of the modern periodic table of elements including the behavior of atoms during
chemical bonding and has played a significant role in the development of many modern
technologies.
In the context of quantum mechanics, the wave–particle duality of energy and matter and
the uncertainty principle provide a unified view of the behavior of photons, electrons, and other
atomic-scale objects.
The course outline as:
Demonstrate an understanding of how quantum states are described by wave functions;
solve the Schrödinger equation and describe the properties of a particle in simple potential
wells;
Solve one-dimensional problems involving transmission, reflection and tunnelling of
quantum probability amplitudes;
Demonstrate an understanding of the significance of operators and eigenvalue problems in
quantum mechanics;
Demonstrate an understanding of angular momentum in quantum mechanics;
Demonstrate an understanding of how quantum mechanics can be used to describe the
hydrogen and helium atoms.
Understand Schrödinger equation in three dimensions, The fundamental postulates of
quantum mechanics
Study and solve functions and eigenvalues, Ladder operators and dynamical variables,
Schrödinger equation in three dimensions in Cartesian coordinates, Schrödinger
equation in in three dimension curvilinear coordinate system
Study the central potentials and understand Hydrogen atom.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
39. Update the content periodically.
40. Using new references.
41. Using web references.
42. increase use of IT
43. increase use of video material
44. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
45. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
-The Need for Quantum Mechanics in Physics:
-Wave packet and uncertainty principle, Schrödinger
equation for free particle, Continuity relation, Reviews of
the fundamental experiments in modern physics.
6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Schrödinger equation in three dimensions, the
fundamental postulates of quantum mechanics. 6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
The parity, Constants of motion and conservation laws,
Momentum eigenfunctions and free body, One-
dimensional potentials:The potential step, The finite
potential well at scattering and bound state.
6 -
- 6 2 3 3 3 17
The potential barrier, The delta-function potential at
Scattering and Bound states.
6 - - 6 2 3 3 3 17
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Simple harmonic oscillator, Oscillator eigenfunctions and
eigenvalues, Ladder operators and dynamical variables,
Schrödinger equation in three dimensions in Cartesian
coordinates, Schrödinger equation in in three dimension
9 - - 9 2 4 3 3 21
Angular momentum and its eigenfunctions and
eigenvlaues
3 - - 3 3 3 3 4 16
The central potentials and Hydrogen atom.
6 - - 6 2 3 3 3 17
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 15 22 21 20 125
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 83 125
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Recall the laws of classical mechanics
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Reviews of the fundamental experiments in
modern physics.
1.3
Describe Schrödinger equation in three
dimensions, the fundamental postulates of
quantum mechanics
1.4
Recall harmonic oscillator in Classical mechanics and introduce harmonic oscillator in quantum mechanics.
1.5 the notion of quantization of physical quantities must be introduced.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
Understand the need for Quantum Mechanics in
physics:
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management. Discussion with
students
Making students
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
1.5
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
English.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The student knowledge of the
basics of Quantum Mechanics I.
Determine the energy of the potential well
of infinite levels and concluded that the
energy levels are quantized.
1, 2 1 a, b,c
Verify Heisenberg uncertainty principle
on few examples. 2,3 3,4 a,c
Write Schrodinger in three dimension and
resolve Harmonic Oscillator. 1,2 2,3
a,b
Find the three components of angular
momentum. 10,11 3 c, d
Learn the basic Quantum
Mechanics I concepts and
principles.
Write operators and dynamical variables,
Schrödinger equation in three dimensions 1,2 1,3,4 c,e,f
Give and represent wave waves packet and
apply Heisenberg principle uncertainty. 5,6 4 b,c
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 8 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 12,18 6 f,,h
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,13 11,12 i,j
Derive expression for Quantum Mechanics I 5,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three or for time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
11- Quantum Mechanics: Concepts and Applications" by Nouredine Zettili
12- Quantum Mechanics, Volume 1.Claude Cohen-Tannoudji, Bernard . Diu B., Laloe F
1- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Phillips, A.C. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (Wiley)
French, A.P. & Taylor, E.F. An Introduction to Quantum Physics (Thomas Nelson)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
22. Course report.
23. Program report.
24. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 46- Course Evaluation
47- Exam Evaluation
48- Improvement plan
49- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
50- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ___________________________
Signature: _____________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _________________________ Dean/Department Head _______________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Electromagntesim-2// Phys 321
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Taleb Maslamani
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 6th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 321
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
Biot – savarts law and Amperes law 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
19. What is the main purpose for this course?
The study of Electric and Magnetic Fields , has played a major role in the development of
physics and in the development of our understanding of the structures of matter as it is
encountered in everyday life. The course outline as:
7. Classification of Vector Fields .
8. Electrostatic fields 9. Electric fields in material space
10. Magnetostatic fields
11. Electromagnetic Wave propagation
*
* 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
14. Update the content periodically.
15. Using new references.
16. Using web references.
17. increase use of IT
18. increase use of video material
19. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
20. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Coordinate systems and Transformation , Vector
Calculus , 6 - - 6 4 3 3 1 17
Classification of Vector Fields 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1 13
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Electrostatic fields ,Electric flux density , Gauss Law –
Maxwell's Equation 6 - - 6 4 3 3 1 16
Electric potential , Relationship between E and V –
Maxwell's Equation , Energy density in Electrostatic
Fields ,
6 - - 6 4 4 3 1 17
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Electric Fields in Material space 9 - - 9 4 4 4 1 22
Magnetostatic Fields , Amperes law – Maxwell's
Equation , Magnetic Flux density – Maxwell's Equation .
Biot – savarts law and Amperes law
9 - - 9 4 4 4 1 22
Electromagnetic Wave propagation , . 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1 13
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 26 24 23 7 128
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact Hours 42 86
Credit 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Demonstrate an understanding of the basic laws of electromagnetism , and related concepts , for stationary charges and moved charges
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
Calculate Electromagnetic properties of simple charge distributions using basic laws of electromagnetism
1.3 Demonstrate an understanding of Maxwells equation
1.4 Demonstrate an understanding of electromagnetic waves
.
1.5 Calculate electromagnetic properties of
electromagnetic waves .
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about Electric and
Magnetic Fields .
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
4
outside the
classroom)
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The study of Electric
and Magnetic Fields
To Know and describe the Magnetic and
Electric field 1, 2 1 a, b
Learning the fundamental Concepts for
Electric and Magnetic field 8,9 2,3 b,
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 10 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
Ability to solve problems 3,4 1,3
c, h
Memorize different technique used in 2,4 3 C, h
The study of Electromagnetic
wave s
Collect general information about some
about some atomic spectra related topics. 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools to solve the spectra
problems
8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Lear n how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for Electromagnetic wave
14,17 13 i
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Elements of electromagnetics , Metthew N.O 3rd Edition
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
13- Elements of electromagnetics , Metthew N.O 3rd Edition
14- Physics for scientists and Engineers ., Serway
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/tmaslamani
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
10. Course report.
11. Program report.
12. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 21- Course Evaluation
22- Exam Evaluation
23- Improvement plan
24- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
25- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr: Taleb Maslamani _____________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ___21/ 4/ 2014
Received by: _Dr: Thamer Al –harbi ____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _____4-2014 __________
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 422 Electronics 4 PHYS 202
PHYS 452 Quantum Mechanics 2 3 PHYS 352
PHYS 495 Modern Physics Lab. 2 PHYS 351
PHYS 481 Nuclear Physics 1 3 PHYS 351
PHYS 471 Solid state physics 1 3 PHYS 352
IC 103 Economic system in Islam 2 IC 101
PHYS 426 Practical Training -- PHYS 392
PHYS 351
Co-current
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Electronics // Phys 422
2. Credit hours: 4 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Abdu Idris Omer
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 202
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
12. What is the main purpose for this course?
Generally speaking, the study of electronics is considered to be the base of the modern
revolution of industrial, communication, control and many other aspects in our life.
The course outline as:
a. Understand the basic principles and abstractions that are used to analyse and design
electronic circuits and systems.
b. Understand the language of electrical and electronic and how to formulate and solve basic
electrical and electronic problems.
c. Understand how electronic circuits and systems fit into the larger context of science
careers, ethics, societal needs, and environmental concerns.
x
x 20
80
2- Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
2. Update the content periodically.
3. Having great confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge.
4. Using new references.
5. Using web references.
6. Willing for continuous and independent learning.
7. Pleasing to learn electronics
8. increase use of video material
9. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
10. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Basic characteristics of ideal and non-ideal PN-diode, Various didoes, e.g. Zener diode, light-emitting diode, etc.
14 - 3 17 1 2 2 2 24
Diode applications, e.g. rectifier, limiting and clamping circuits, etc.;
14 - 3 17 1 2 2 2 24
Mid-term 1 - - 4 - 4
Basic characteristics of BJTs and FETs and Biasing of BJT and FETs circuits; BJT and FET small signal model and its parameters;
12 - 3 15 1 2 2 2 22
Analysis of BJT and FETs circuits at DC and AC; Analysis
of both ideal and practical Op-Amp circuits; 12 - 3 15 1 2 2 2 22
Mid-term 2 - - 2 2
Digital concepts, Binary and Hexadecimal System, 12 - 3 15 1 2 2 2 22
Flip-flops, Shift Registers, Counters and Memories. 12 - 3 15 1 2 2 2 22
Review 9 - 3 12 1 2 2 2 19
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 85 - 21 114 7 14 14 14 163
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit
Contact Hours
Self study
Other:
Total Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
ECTS
5 85 21
49 8 163
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Knowledge in basic sciences, mathematics, and
electronic principles.
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
Knowledge in the fundamentals of electronic
principles and practices, including analysis, design,
evaluation, and management.
1.3
An understanding of the professional and ethical
responsibility of electronic profession.
1.4
Understanding of the role of electronic and impact
of electronic in global context.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
Collect data and information and perform
analysis, interpretation and draw inferences or
conclusions
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2
Perform in-depth study and analysis of
electronic problems, and find innovative or
creative solutions based on economy, feasibility
and safety.
2.3
Evaluate alternative designs and solutions, with
an understanding of the impact of the
proposed solution.
6
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
The students will have the ability to work
constructively in groups.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
English.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2
Students should be responsible for their own
learning that requires using means to find new
information data, or techniques of analysis.
3.3
The students should be aware of ethical and
professional issues involving values and moral
judgments in ways that are sensitive to others
and consistent with underlying values and
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will have the ability to communicate
in English both orally and in writing.
Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2
Student will have sufficient knowledge in
information technology that will enable them to
gather, interpret, and communicate information
and ideas.
4.3
Students will have sufficient background in
statistical or mathematical techniques that will
enable them to apply in interpreting and
proposing solutions.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Understand the basic
principles and abstractions
that are used to analyse and
Knowledge in basic sciences, mathematics,
and electronic principles. 1, 2,6,7 1 a, b
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam 12 10%
4 Presentation One/ semester
10%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
design electronic circuits and
systems. Knowledge in the fundamentals of
electronic principles and practices,
including analysis, design, evaluation, and
management.
8,9 2,3 b,
An understanding of the professional and
ethical responsibility of electronic
profession.
3,4 1,3
c, h
2,4 3 C, h
Understand the language of
electrical and electronic and
how to formulate and solve
basic electrical and electronic
problems.
Collect data and information and
perform analysis, interpretation and
draw inferences or conclusions
7 6,7 H,f
Perform in-depth study and analysis of
electronic problems, and find innovative
or creative solutions based on economy,
feasibility and safety
8,9 8 g
Evaluate alternative designs and
solutions, with an understanding of the
impact of the proposed solution
6,7 9 h
10, 14 11 gh
Understand how electronic
circuits and systems fit into
the larger context of science
careers, ethics, societal needs,
and environmental concerns.
The students will have the ability to
work constructively in groups.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Students should be responsible for their
own learning that requires using means
to find new information data, or
techniques of analysis.
14,17 13 i
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
15- N. R. Malik, Electronic Circuit Analysis, Simulation and Design, Prentice-Hall, 1995 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Electronic Devices by Thomas L. Floyd, PEARSON Prentice Hall 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software. 1- Multisim software for electrical and electronic circuits
2- Lab view software
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Audio Visual electronic laboratory provided with data show and projector system.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer lab for electronic circuit simulation. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Regular evaluation of the theoretical and practical parts of the course to identify the weaknesses
areas
Performance appraisal form filled up by each student to show level of fulfillment
Confidential completion of standard course evaluation questionnaire
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
A statistical regular review and analysis of the students’ achievement in the department.
Prepare a questionnaire which should be filled by the students at the end of the term.
The questionnaire should be after that analyzed and carefully studied. 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Provide training and workshop opportunities for the teaching staff to improve their teaching
strategies.
Form committees to follow up progress and work on improvement.
Provide opportunities to improve academic courses and research through conferences.
Provide the teaching staff members with all the references and electronic resources.
Updating through more reading books and articles related to the course
Improve relations between instructor and students.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching staff in
addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course should be developed
periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study. Development could be put as an
objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Student’s feedback on the quality of the course.
Consulting other faculty members or collaborators in overseas universities for their views on the
method of quality of improvement
Check other universities web sites to compare our lectures with them
Compare the syllabus with the syllabus of standard universities.
Form a specialized committee from the department to review the progress of teaching and update
the resources
Consult distinguished students and discuss with them positive and negative points in Lectures.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ___________________________
Signature: _____________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _________________________ Dean/Department Head _______________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 13/6/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Quantum Mechanics II // Phys 452
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ali ZAIDI
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): PHYS 352 7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course? On completion successful students will be able to:
Demonstrate an understanding of how quantum states are described by wave functions;
solve the Schrödinger equation and describe the properties of a particle in simple potential wells;
Solve one-dimensional problems involving transmission, reflection and tunnelling of quantum probability
amplitudes;
Demonstrate an understanding of the significance of operators and eigenvalue problems in quantum
mechanics;
Demonstrate an understanding of angular momentum and addition of two momentums in quantum
mechanics;
Demonstrate an understanding of how quantum mechanics can be used to describe the hydrogen and
helium atoms.
Use perturbation theory (time independent or time dependent)n to resolve approximately Schrödinger
equation: the Stark effect, Hyper fined splitting.
Study and use Variational principle and its applications, The WKB approximation
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
21. Update the content periodically.
22. Using new references.
23. Using web references.
24. increase use of IT
25. increase use of video material
26. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
27. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Dirac notation, Vector space algebra and Hilbert space
Rephrasing wave mechanics and operator methods in abstract
view,
Angular momentum commutation relations, Raising and
lowering operators for angular momentum,
6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Expansion theory in abstract view, Matrix representation
of angular momentum operators, General relations in
matrix mechanics,
6 - - 6 2 3 3 2 16
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
General relations in matrix mechanics, Eigenstates of spin
½, The intrinsic magnetic moment of spin ½ particles,
Addition of two spins, Addition of Spin ½ and orbital
angular momentum.
6 -
- 6 2 3 3 3 17
Time-independent perturbation theory and energy shifts,
Degenerate perturbation theory, The Stark effect,
Hyperfined splitting,
6 - - 6 2 3 3 3 17
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Variational principle and its applications, The WKB
approximation, Time-dependent perturbation theory, 9 - - 9 2 4 3 3 21
The interaction of charged particle with electromagnetic
field. 3 - - 3 2 3 3 3 14
Two level-system emission and absorption of radiations,
spontaneous emission, Transition rate, selection rule,
scattering theory
Partial wave analysis, The Born approximation.
6 - - 6 3 3 3 4 19
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 15 22 21 20 125
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 83 125
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Recall the laws of Quantum Mechanics I Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Remember Quantum Mechanics postulates.
1.3 Describe orbital angular momentum and
intrinsic angular momentum
1.4 Recall harmonic oscillator in quantum mechanics and eigenvalues and Eigen states.
1.5 Remember expectation value and apply variationnel method..
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
-Understand Hilbert space and ket bra notion in
Quantum Mechanics:
Problem solving
Class discussion Class Participation
1.5
2.2
Use the Hilbert space, linear operator, hermitic
operator to understanding quantum physics
phenomena.
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
English.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2
Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials,
Matrix, Hermitic operators , eigenvalues and Eigen states of, Hermitic operators.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended. Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three or for time/ semester
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The student knowledge of the
basics of Quantum Mechanics I.
Familiarize with Dirac notation, Vector
space algebra and Hilbert space
Rephrasing wave mechanics and operator
methods in abstract view.
1, 2 1 a, b,c
Good use ofnAngular momentum
commutation relations, Raising and
lowering operators for angular momentum .
2,3 3,4 a,c
Understand and apply Time-
independent perturbation theory and
energy shifts, Degenerate perturbation
theory, The Stark effect, Hyperfined
splitting,
1,2 2,3
a,b
Calculate and represent the Stark effect,
Hyperfined splitting,. 10,11,12 3 c, d
Learn the basic of Quantum
Mechanics II
Definite and illustrated variationnel
method 2,3 1,3,4 c,e
Verify Time-independent perturbation
theory and energy shifts in the case of
Harmonic oscillator. .
5 4 b,c
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 8 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 12,18 6 f,,h
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,13 11,12 i,j
Derive expression for Quantum MechanicsII 17 13 I, k
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
16- Quantum Mechanics: Concepts and Applications" by Nouredine Zettili
17- Quantum Mechanics, Volume 1.Claude Cohen-Tannoudji, Bernard . Diu B., Laloe F
18- Quantum Mechanics, Volume 2.Claude Cohen-Tannoudji, Bernard . Diu B., Laloe F
1- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Phillips, A.C. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (Wiley)
French, A.P. & Taylor, E.F. An Introduction to Quantum Physics (Thomas Nelson)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
13. Course report.
14. Program report.
15. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 26- Course Evaluation
27- Exam Evaluation
28- Improvement plan
29- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
30- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 10/4/2014
College/Department : College of Science / Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Modern Physics Lab. (PHYS 495)
2. Credit hours: 2 (0+4+0)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Bachelor of Physics (BSc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course:
Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
level / 4th
year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Modern Physics (PHYS 351)
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any): ---
8. Location if not on main campus:
Complex of colleges in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The other 85% is conducted in the laboratory.
B Objectives
20. What is the main purpose for this course?
This course is a practical course. It provides hands-on experience with experiments in modern
physics that are challenging at varying levels of expertise. Some of the theoretical principles learnt
at the course of modern physics will be employed and emphasized upon in this course.
√
85
15
√
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the
field)
It is intended in this course to:
28. Update the content periodically.
29. Update the software used in this lab. continuously.
30. Add new experiments (if possible) in the laboratory to cover other physical principles.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Wo
rk L
oa
d
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
La
b.
rep
ort
s
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Training on Excel and Origin software.
4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 19
Photoelectric effect experiment. Planck’s constant determination.
4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 15
Millikan oil drop experiment. 4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 12
Balmer series, and Rydberg’s constant determination.
4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 27
Mid-term 1
Normal Zeeman effect. 4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 25
e/m determination experiment. 4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 13
Moseley’s law using x-ray 4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 9
Mid-term 2
Energy spectrum of a crystal using x-ray
4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 15
Effect of voltage and current on the x-ray spectrum.
4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 11
Frank – Hertz experiment. 4 4 1 1 1.5 0.5 13
Review 4 4 2
Final Exam 2 2 2
Total 46 46 10 10 15 5 86
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 46 40 56
Credit 2 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
NQF Learning Domains and Course Learning
Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To remember the Physics Law of lab’s experiments Lab Lectures Exams.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 To distinguish and analyze the different schematics
and graphs related to certain experiment.
Small group work.
Lab. demonstrations.
Exams.
Discussion.
Lab. Reports.
In-lab. evaluation.
2.2 To read, explain and interpret the results of an
experiment
2.3 To write laboratory reports. Relate the experiments
to the theories related.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 To participate in class discussion. Practice the
safety and organizing rules of the laboratories.
Awareness of time
management in
completing their
reports.
Encourage students to
help each other
Small group work.
Lab. demonstrations.
Whole group
discussion.
Respecting deadlines.
Helping each other in
doing their
experiments.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
In-lab. evaluation
(Showing active class
participation).
Oral exams.
3.2
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Displays teamwork and shows
professional commitment to ethical practice.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 To communicate with the teacher and students
using communications technology.
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Whole group
discussion.
Lecture.
Lab. demonstrations.
correspondences.
E-learning.
Exams.
Homework.
Lab reports
4.2 To use software programs in writing, inserting and
analyzing data, and plotting graphs.
5.0 Psychomotor
2.8 hours
5.1
To assemble the experiment correctly. To operate
the experiment and any attached computer quickly
and accurately. Lab. demonstrations.
Lab. reports.
In-lab. evaluation 5.2
To measure the different physical parameters in the
laboratory professionally and accurately.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Familiarize the student with
some of the basic instruments
and measurement techniques
typically employed in the
experimental work of the
various fields of modern
physics.
To distinguish and analyze the different
schematics and graphs related to certain
experiment.
c, d, f 1, 2 c, d
To read, explain and interpret the results of
an experiment c, d, e, f 4, 5, 6 e, f
To write laboratory reports. Relate the
experiments to the theories related. c, d, e, f 4, 5, 6 g, h
To provide the student with
opportunities to learn proper
data recording, analysis, and
reporting techniques,
including the use of
spreadsheets, graphical
displays and curve fitting
routines, the application of
appropriate error analysis
methodologies, and the
maintenance of an accurate
and complete scientist’s
notebook.
To participate in class discussion. Practice
the safety and organizing rules of the
laboratories.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9, 10 k, l
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Displays teamwork and
shows professional commitment to ethical
practice.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9, 10 k
To communicate with the teacher and
students using communications
technology.
j, k (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
Develop positive attitudes
towards seeking facts and
scientific research, such as
developing effective
strategies for designing and
implementing experimental
solutions to problems
requiring physical
measurements.
To use software programs in writing,
inserting and analyzing data, and plotting
graphs.
j, k (1, 3,
4, 5) 12, 13 P
Provide a foundation for most
of other physics laboratories
and the skill of using different
devices.
To assemble the experiment correctly. To
operate the experiment and any attached
computer quickly and accurately.
k (1 ,2, 3) 14 g
To measure the different physical
parameters in the laboratory professionally
and accurately.
k (1 ,2, 3) 14 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 Final Practical Exam 15 40 %
2 Final theoretical exam 15 10 %
3 Lab. reports weekly 30 %
4 In-lab. evaluation weekly 20 %
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the academic advisor assigned for each student, or
from the unit of academic guidance.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Concepts of modern physics; Arthur Beiser; McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 6th edition;
(2002).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.) Experiment manual.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Modern Physics; Raymond A. Serway, Clement J. Moses, Curt A. Moyer; Cengage Learning; 3rd
edition; (2004).
Elementary Modern Physics; A. P. Arya; Addison-Wesley; (1974) 4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://demonstrations.wolfram.com
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/salzobaidi hazemsakeek.com
http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/hph.html
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Excel software for drawing graphs in the lab.
Word office for writing reports.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
1 laboratory with the capacity of maximum 12 students is required (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
The laboratory is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for the laboratory.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of maximum three faculty members are assigned for each subject to review the
checking of the first, second and final exams.
An internal revision report is written by the committee for each course.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
Signature: Date Report Completed: 12/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Al-harbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 25/3/1435
College/Department College of Science Al-Zulfi / Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Nuclear Physics I // PHYS 481
2. Credit hours 3 hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ahmed Adel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
7th
level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
PHYS 351
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
No
8. Location if not on main campus
College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 85% and
Traditional online with 15%]
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course?
The course describes the properties of nuclei and various models useful for the description of nuclear
properties. It covers nuclear binding energy, nuclear stability, and radioactive decays. It also covers the
different types of nuclear reactions, nuclear detectors and nuclear accelerators.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Develop a clear understanding of the basic concepts in nuclear physics.
2. Explain the physical principles underlying the liquid drop model of the nucleus and use it
to explain nuclear masses and binding energies.
3. Acquire knowledge of natural radioactivity and various decay modes.
4. Be familiar with the different types of nuclear reactions, nuclear detectors and nuclear
accelerators.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
5. Annual review of the course using recent textbooks and references.
6. Electronic materials and computer based programs are used to support the lecture
√
√
85 %
15 %
course.
7. Increase use of video material
8. Exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Nuclear properties:
constituents of the nucleus,
nuclear radius and mass
3 - - 3 2 2 3 1 11
Binding energy and semi-
empirical mass formula 6 - - 6 2 2 3 1 14
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Natural Radioactivity: Decay
law-Nuclear stability – Alpha,
Beta and Gamma decays
9 - - 9 3 3 3 1 19
Artificial Radioactivity:
Discovery of artificial
radionuclides – Interaction of
radiation with matter
6 - - 6 3 3 3 1 16
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Nuclear Reactions:
Nuclear Fission and Nuclear
Fusion
9 - - 9 3 3 3 2 20
Radiation Detectors 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1 13
Nuclear Accelerators 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1 13
Review 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1 13
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 22 22 24 9 125
Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact hours Self-Study Others Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
NCAAA 3 48 ---
--- --- 77
--- 125
ECTS 5 48 ---
--- --- 77
--- 125
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
5. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop.
A description of teaching strategies used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Recognize the constituents of the nucleus. Developing basic
communicative ability
through:
- Lecturing
- Team work
- Discussion
- Exercises
- Class Participation
- Graded homework
- Quizzes
- Midterms
- Final Exam
1.2 Identify basic nuclear properties such the nuclear charge,
nuclear radius, and nuclear mass.
1.3 Identify the nuclear binding energy and semi-empirical
mass formula.
1.4 Describe natural radioactivity and the differences
between various decay modes.
1.5 Recognize the different types of nuclear reactions.
1.6 Identify nuclear radiation detectors.
1.7 List different types of nuclear accelerators.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Demonstrate the ability to solve basic problems
involving the application of the concepts of nuclear
physics in those practical situations covered in the
course.
- Problem solving
-Class discussion
-Project presentation
- Class Participation
- Presentation
- Essay Question
2.2 Establish the key relationships describing nuclear
3 Hours
behavior and properties of radiation, which are most
commonly exploited in areas of application, and show
how they can be derived from fundamental concepts and
nuclear properties.
- Research
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Completing assignments in due time.
-Discussion with students
- Making students aware
about time management in
completing their assignments
and projects
-Encourage students to help
each other
- Group presentation
- Group assignments
- Evaluation of group reports
and individual contribution
within the group
- Peer or self-assessment
-Performance on midterms
and final exams are evidence
of the student’s ability to
retain and analyze information
3.2 Participate in class discussion and think critically.
3.3 Acting responsibly and ethically in carrying out
individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Communicate, listen, negotiate, and evaluate their
strengths and weaknesses as members of a team.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Developing the student skills in the usage of computer,
network, and software packages relevant to nuclear
physics.
- Exercises
- Problem solving
- Oral quizzes
- Essay questions
-Oral Presentation
-Oral Examination
-Essay Question
4.2 Improving student communication skills such as :
writing, reading, presenting, negotiating and debating
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Develop a clear understanding
of the basic concepts in nuclear
physics
Recognize the constituents of the
nucleus
1,2 2 a,b
Describe basic nuclear properties such
as the nuclear charge, nuclear radius,
nuclear mass, angular momentum and
parity.
1,2 2 a
Explain the physical principles
underlying the liquid drop
model of the nucleus and use it
to explain nuclear masses and
binding energies.
Identify the nuclear binding energy and
semi-empirical mass formula.
1,2,5 1,4 c
Apply the liquid drop model to
calculate the nuclear binding energy. 10, 20 5, 6 b, d
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 18 12 p
Acquire knowledge of natural
radioactivity and various decay
modes.
Describe natural radioactivity and the
differences between various decay
modes.
2,5 2 c
Derive expression for the Q-value for
different radioactive decay processes.
21 4 c
Apply the selection rules of various
decay modes to determine the allowed
and forbidden transitions
6 4 d
Be familiar with the different
types of nuclear reactions,
nuclear detectors and nuclear
accelerators.
Recognize the different types of
nuclear reactions.
1,2 2
a,b
Identify nuclear radiation detectors.
. 2 2 g
List different types of nuclear
accelerators. 1,2,5 2 g
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form
and orally using appropriate scientific
language.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Construct the mathematical formulation
suitable for the theoretical analysis of
various decay modes.
14,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation -
20%
5 Homework Weekly
6 Quizzes End of topics
7 Discussions Weekly
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials -
10 Computer tools used Every report
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Office hours 6 hr/ week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Introductory Nuclear Physics, K.S. Krane,2
nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1988.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.) Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6
th edition
Physical Review C
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Quantum Mechanics, S. Gasiorowicz, 3ed
Edition, Wiley, 2003
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.) http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
www.eagle.co.uk/news/ppnews.html
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
http://vlib.org/physics.html
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software. Mathematica Program is used to solve deferential equations, integrals.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
2. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room with at least 25 seats.
Auditorium of a capacity of not less than 100 seats for large lecture format classes
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.) A smart board to write on and computer.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list) Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching Student evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor There is a department committee responsible for the development of the strategies of Teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 25. Course report.
26. Program report.
27. Training Courses.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 51- Course Evaluation
52- Exam Evaluation
53- Improvement plan
54- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
55- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 20-4-2014 (20/6/1435)
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Solid State Physics // PHYS 471
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs):
BS-Physics, 4 Years Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Optional (7) / 4th
Year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Quantum mechanics-1: PHYS 352
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Department of Physics, Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
21. What is the main purpose for this course?
f) Aim of this course is to provide a base to students for his future research and study
planning.
g) After successful completion of this course student will be able to understand Fundamentals
of Solid State Physics and some basics properties and behavior of Solid Materials.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
31. Update the content periodically with reference new development .
32. Using new Book and Journals References.
33. Using Web References.
34. Increase use of IT.
35. Increase use of Video Materials/Animation materials.
36. Introduction of open source specialized software for theoretical work.
37. Proper and increase use of multimedia in class.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
x
x 20
80
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Home
Work
Discuss-
ions
CRYSTAL STRUCTURE
Lattices (Bravais and non-Bravais
lattices), Primitive and non
primitive unit cell, Wigner-Seitz
unit cell.
6 - - 6 4 2 4 2 18
Symmetry and symmetry
operations, Miller indices and
planes, Classification of lattices,
2-dimensional and 3-dimensional
lattices, (NaCl, CsCl, ZnS and
diamond lattices), Reciprocal
lattice.
6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 2
CRYSTAL DIFFRACTION
Bragg's law, Von-Laue equation,
Experimental techniques of X-ray
diffraction (Laue method,
Rotating crystal method, Powder
method), Electron diffraction.,
Neutron diffraction.
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
CRYSTAL BINDING
Covalent bonding, Metallic
bonding, Hydrogen bonding,
Ionic bonding, Cohesive energy
of ionic crystals, Van-der-Waals
bonding, Van-der-Waals London
interaction.
6 - - 6 2 2 4 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
LATTICE VIBRATIONS AND
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF
SOLID
Dispersion relation of phonons
for one-dimensional Mono-
atomic and Diatomic linear
lattices, Physical difference
between optical and acoustic
branches, Excitation of optical
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
branch, Quantization of Elastic
Waves Phonons, -Phonon
Momentum.
Lattice heat capacity, Dulong and
Petit Law for specific heat of
solids, Einstein Model of specific
heat of solids, Debye model of
specific heat of solids with high
and low temperature limitations
9 - - 9 6 4 6 2 27
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 3 9
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 21 22 24 17 132
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Fundamental Concepts of Solid State Physics and
Crystal Structure
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through short
and varied situated
discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exams
Terminal Exam. (Final
Exam)
1.2 Crystal Diffraction and experimental techniques
of crystal diffraction.
1.3 Different types Crystal binding
1.4 Lattice vibrations
1.5 Thermal properties of solid
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Can conduct general literature survey on particular
topic of semiconductor and devices under study.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging students
to discuss different
topics outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Can correlate and understanding the theoretical
results with experimental data .
2.3 Able to know some available simulation software
for any future research work.
5:15 hours
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students how
to make a good
presentation .
Encourage students to
help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other students
to understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through library
and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Mathematical Methods
4.1 Take part in discussion with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Interpret/operate differential equations, integrations,
and Matrix that often come lectures.
4.3
Rise to the point questions during the lecture, work
in groups, and communicate with class fellows and
with me electronically, and periodically visit the
web sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the
classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
The student knowledge of the
basics of Solid State Physics
and their properties
Easily differentiate the materials from each
other on the basis of their crystal structure. 1, 2 1 a, b
Understand diffraction formula and its co-
relation with crystal diffraction. 8,9 2,3 b,
Differentiate Physical and chemical nature
of crystal binding energy e.g weak and
strong bindingenergy
3,4 1,3 c, h
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
*First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week for Student Academic Counseling and Support
Understand different crystal structure
techniques use for the determination of
Crystal structures.
2,4 3 C, h
Learn, understand and get
concepts of theories related to
the basic properties of Solids
and their correlation with
experimental techniques.
Collect general information about some
properties of solids with respect to some
related topics.
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools to solve the spectra
problems
8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 Gh
The development of students'
intellectual abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally on given topics. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive equations of Einstein and Debye theories and check how specific heat of solids behave at low and high temperature regions with experimental finings
14,17 13 I
1. List Required Textbooks
4. C. Kittel and P. McEuen, Introduction to solid state physics, 8th ed. (Wiley, New York ;
Chichester, 2005).
5. P. Phillips, Advanced solid state physics, 2nd ed. (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,
2012).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1. S. A. Holgate, Understanding solid state physics. (CRC Press, Boca Raton ; London, 2010).
2. M. A. Omar, Elementary solid state physics : principles and applications, World student series ed.
(Addison-Wesley Pub. Co, Reading, Mass ; London, 1975).
3. H. Ibach and H. Lüth, Solid-state physics : an introduction to principles of materials science, 3rd
extensively updated and enlarged ed. (Springer, Berlin ; New York, 2003).
4. F. Han, Problems in solid state physics with solutions. (World Scientific, Singapore ; Hackensack,
NJ, 2012).
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Journal of Applied Physics
Applied Physics Letters
Physical Review B
Journal of Physics C: Solid State Physics
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
en.wikipedia.org
pveducation.org
http:// faculty.mu.edu.sa /aabdulmjid
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
MATHEMATICA,
MATLAB,
Origin
Labview
MathCAD
MS Office (particularly MS Excel)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Furnished Lecture Room equipped with smart board and computer
Solid State Physics Lab
X-Ray Diffraction Lab.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computational Lab with proper software
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi Internet Connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course/module evaluation system electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
department has its own teacher evaluation committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Mechanism is available for verification of Standards by
Course committee for each course/Module
Course Committee Check each results and student answer sheet
Course file maintained by teacher along with highest, middle and lowest grade student’s answer
sheets
Periodically improvement in course content with insertion the latest developments in the field
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
31- Course Evaluation
32- Exam Evaluation
33- Improvement plan
34- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
35- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______ Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed____________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __April 20, 2014_____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: ___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 10/4/2014
College/Department : College of Science / Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Training Course (PHYS 495)
2. Credit hours: No Credit Hours.
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Bachelor of Physics (BSc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course:
Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
level / 4th
year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): PHYS 392 + PHYS 351
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any): ---
8. Location if not on main campus:
Complex of colleges in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The other 50 % is conducted in the laboratory.
The percentages may change depending on the type of training is intended by the instructor.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
This course is an introductory course for the project course. The student will be prepared on how
to write a scientific report, use certain advanced instruments, and use some professional
software’s. Based on the specialization of the instructor the student’s orientation will be in one or
more of the main fields of physics: Classical mechanics, thermodynamics, solid state physics,
energy, nuclear physics, electronics, quantum mechanics, and atomic physics.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the
field)
This is a new course that will be taught in the near future.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
√
√
50 - 75
25 - 50
25 - 50
√
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Wo
rk L
oa
d
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b.
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
La
b.
rep
ort
s
Dis
cuss
ion
s
How to write a report 5 5 5 5 15
Mid-term 1
Software training 5 -
20
5 -
20 4 5
14 -
29
Mid-term 2
Instrument’s training 0 -
30
0 -
30
0 -
4
0 -
5
0 - 39
Data processing and analyzing 5 5 -
20
10 -
25 10 10 20
50 -
65
Final Exam
Total 10 10 -
70
20 -
80
14 -
18 15 20
10 -
15
79 -
148
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 10 10 - 70 20 - 80
Credit -- --
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
10. A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
11. A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or
skill;
12. The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
6.5 hours
NQF Learning Domains and Course Learning
Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To know and describe the basic principles of the
topic of the research conducted. Lectures
Progress evaluation by the
instructor
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
To write research reports. Relate the experiments to
the theories. To explain and justify the results
obtained from the experiment.
Lectures
Practical training
Progress evaluation by the
instructor
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Shows professional commitment to
ethical practice.
Awareness of time
management.
Lectures.
Lab. demonstrations.
Respecting deadlines.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
In-lab. evaluation
Oral exams.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 To communicate with the teacher using
communications technology.
Encourage the student
to use program soft
wear
Lecture.
Lab. demonstrations.
correspondences.
E-learning.
Project report 4.2 To use software programs in writing, inserting and
analyzing data, and plotting graphs.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
To assemble the experiment correctly. To operate
the experiment and any attached computer quickly
and accurately. Lab. demonstrations.
Project reports.
Progress evaluation 5.2
To measure the different physical parameters in the
laboratory professionally and accurately.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Train the student on the skills
of writing scientific reports
To know and describe the basic principles
of the topic of the research conducted. a 1, 2 c
To write research reports. Relate the
experiments to the theories. To explain and
justify the results obtained from the
experiment.
c 3, 5 d, e
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Shows professional
commitment to ethical practice.
c, d 7, 10 e, f, j
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1
Continuous evaluation weekly
This is a non-credit
course, no grading
is required
2 Writing scientific report 12-14
3 Running software 4
4 Operating the instrument 7
5 Total
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the supervisor assigned for each student.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Based on the title of the project the textbook (if any) will be assigned by the instructor.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Any reference that is related or assigned by the instructor.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Based on the title of the project the textbook (if any) will be assigned by the instructor.
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Any electronic reference that is related or assigned by the instructor.
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
Run all software necessary
for the project.
To communicate with the teacher using
communications technology. h, e 11, 12 k, l, r
To use software programs in writing,
inserting and analyzing data, and plotting
graphs.
d, h, I, j 12, 13 k, p
Operate the instruments
required for the project
professionally.
To assemble the experiment correctly. To
operate the experiment and any attached
computer quickly and accurately.
k 14 g
To measure the different physical
parameters in the laboratory professionally
and accurately.
k 14 p
software.
Excel software for drawing graphs in the lab.
Word office for writing reports.
Any additional software needed for the project.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
A laboratory if the project is experimental (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
All classrooms and laboratories are equipped with internet, smart boards and its running software
‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for both classrooms and laboratories.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of all the faculty members is assigned for the project to review and discuss the
project.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
Signature: Date Report Completed: 12/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Al-harbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours Pre-requisite Observations
PHYS 455 Atomic and molecular
physics 3 PHYS 352
PHYS 497 Solid state physics lab. 2 PHYS 471
PHYS 498 Nuclear Physics lab 2 PHYS 481
PHYS 499 Project 2 PHYS 496
-- -- Department elective 3 --
-- -- Department elective 3 --
-- -- Department elective 2 ---
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Atomic and Molecules Physics // Phys 455
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Hassan Hanafy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 352
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
B Objectives
22. What is the main purpose for this course?
The study of atoms and molecules has played a major role in the development of physics and
in the development of our understanding of the structures of matter as it is encountered in
everyday life. The course outline as:
13. Comparing between atomic emission spectroscopy and atomic absorption
spectroscopy; Optical spectroscopy, Atomic spectrum,
14. Atomic emission / absorption spectrophotometry Molecular spectroscopy,
15. Theory of magnetic energy, Anomalous Zeeman’s effect and Lande splitting factor.
16. Molecular Spectra of diatomic molecules Vibrational and Rotational energy levels.
17. Basic Laser principles, Laser behavior, Properties of laser radiations, Different types
of lasers, Laser spectroscopy, Laser applications.
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
38. Update the content periodically.
39. Using new references.
40. Using web references.
41. increase use of IT
42. increase use of video material
43. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
44. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l w
ork
load
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Basic principles of spectroscopy 3 - - 3 2 1 2 1 9
Different models for atomic structures 6 - - 6 2 1 3 2 14
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 - 2
Quantum mechanics of hydrogen atom and many
electron atom 6 - - 6 3 2 3 2 16
Atom in electric magnetic fields 6 - - 6 3 2 3 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
Molecular spectroscopy 9 - - 9 5 3 4 2 23
Laser spectroscopy 9 - - 9 5 3 3 2 22
Review 3 - - 3 6 3 4 2 18
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 26 15 22 15 126
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 48 78 126
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 List different types of atomic spectra and related instrumentation. Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Describe theories explaining the structure of atoms and the origin of the observed spectra.
1.3 Identify atomic effect such as space quantization and Zeeman effect.
1.4 Describe the molecular bonding and molecular energies.
1.5 Memorize different technique used in laser and applications
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about some about some
atomic spectra related topics.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the mathematical modelling, experimental
work in understanding physics phenomena.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management. Discussion with
students
Making students
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
3.5
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The student knowledge of the
basics of science atom and
molecules
List different types of atomic and molecular
spectra and related instrumentation. 1, 2 1 a, b
Describe theories explaining the structure of
atoms and the origin of the observed spectra 8,9 2,3 b,
Identify atomic effect such as space
quantization and Zeeman Effect. 3,4 1,3 c, h
Memorize different technique used in laser
and applications. 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic atomic
concepts and principles, and
the basics of emission
Collect general information about some
about some atomic spectra related topics. 7 6,7 H,f
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
The Physics of Atoms and Quanta, Haken and Wolf , 7th
Edition, New youk 2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
19- Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6th
edition
20- The Physics of Atoms and Quanta, Haken and Wolf , 7th
Edition, New youk 21- Lasr Physics
spectroscopy with a highlight
on its practical and scientific
significance.
Apply the gained mathematical and
experimental tools to solve the spectra
problems
8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for atomic spectra based on Bohr-Summerfield theories.
14,17 13 i
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
5- Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6th
edition
6- The Physics of Atoms and Quanta, Haken and Wolf , 7th
Edition, New youk
7- Atomic Physics Dmitry Budker, Derek F.Kimball, and David P. DeMille Oxford 2nd
Ed. (2006). 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/hhanafy
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
16. Course report.
17. Program report.
18. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 36- Course Evaluation
37- Exam Evaluation
38- Improvement plan
39- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
40- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____Dr. Hassan Hanafy____________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 19/6/1435 H
College/Department: College of Science – Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Solid State Lab. – PHYS-497
2. Credit hours: 2
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Solid State Physics I – PHYS - 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The instruction is taken place by traditional classroom, through my home page on the university
web site, smart boards, scientific discussions and scientific videos from the internet.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
10. Brief characterization of the learning outcomes.
11. Supporting the experimental and application experiences for students and improvements
of their skills. 12. Supporting the courses PHIS-271 and PHIS-472 with experiments. 13. Preparing students for future research and developments.
14. Describing plans to be developed.
15. Seeking for recent search works related with the course.
16. Experimental correlations between the mathematical basics and physical applications. 2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Periodical physics department meetings every 2 years to review the courses according to the
reports of the internal reviewers from the department and the feedback from students in the
course evaluation questionnaire. Also, the use of the trusted physics web sites for the students
during making their reports and presentations.
80%
10%
10%
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
A full academic year is equivalent to 36 Credit hour, which each semester is to be 18 Credit hour.
Each course is credited with a number of credit hour (>=2) according to the student's workload
(contact hours, laboratory work, examination etc) and accumulation of credits hour is
accomplished after successful completion of the course. In this case, one Credit hour is equal 25 –
30 student's workload hour.
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Internet Library Homewo
rk
Discussi
ons
Description of theoretical
phenomenon and
considerations for all
experiments.
- - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Thermoelectric effect in
semiconductors (calculation
of Seebeck, Peltier and
Thomson coefficients)
- - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Solar Cells - - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Determination of the
thermal coefficient of a
noble metal (platinum) by
computer
- - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
X-ray spectroscopy and
calculation of Planck's
constant and Miller indices
of crystal planes in NaCl
single crystal
- - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Exam – 1 - - - 4 - - - - 4
X-ray ionization chamber - - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Hall Effect - - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Studying the crystline
structure by using the field
effect microscope
- - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Review - - 4 4 1 1 2 1 9
Final Exam - - - 4 - - - - 4
Total - - 36 44 9 9 18 9 89
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 36 N/A N/A N/A 53 89
Credit 0.808 N/A N/A N/A 1.192 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Assurance of the basic knowledge of the main
physical phenomenon for solid state courses.
Traditional lab., group
discussions and internet
web sites
Reports, presentations or
homeworks
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Understanding the main physical phenomenon
and learning how to calculate the physical
quantities related to the experiments and
comparing them with the known values
Traditional classroom,
discussions and internet
web sites
Exams and quizzes
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Choose to work in a group and learn time
management.
Encouragement of the
student to attend lectures
regularly by giving bonus
marks for attendance, give
students tasks, and ask
questions about previous
lectures.
Quizzes
3.2 Demonstrate how to search for information
through library and internet.
Mutual respect is between
the lecturer and students and
among students themselves. I
deal with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
Discussions
5 hours on average
3.3 Justify a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language.
Application of educational
standards and behavioural
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit and
good character.
Report
3.4 Discussions for the sources of errors. Encouragement of the
student to have the ability
to make presentations and
oral discussions with his
colleges
Discussions
3.5 Good handling with systems and taking data. Encouragement of the
student for handling with
systems in order to have
the sense of gentle
handling.
Experimental works
3.6 Learning how to be precise and care with systems. Teaching students to be
precise and care with
handling systems
Experimental works
3.7 Perfection of data analysis and search for the sources of
errors. Teaching students how to
make data analysis and
search for the sources of
errors.
Exams and reports
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Ability to communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Solving problems on smart
board.
Discussions
4.2 Dealing with confidence with differential equations,
integrations, and differentials. Although this skill is not
taught within the course, it is necessary to deal with him.
Group assignments,
homeworks and encouraging
group projects
Home works and
presentations
4.3 Using information technology in the classroom and
library. Encouraging reports and
presentations
Reports and presentations
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Use a perfect experimental tools to solve physics
problems Teaching students how to
use an appropriate tools.
Reports, discussions and
exams
5.2 Utilize a computer software program, to identify and
develop physical issues problems. Teaching students to use
computer systems.
Reports, discussions and
exams
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project, examination, speech,
oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1
Reports All weeks 10
2
Attendance All weeks 10
3
Exam 1 Week 6 30
4
Presentations During the
semester
10
5 Final exam Week 13 40
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least, there are three hours for academic advice and consultations for students per week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Kittel, Charles. Introduction to Solid State Physics. 8th ed. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, 2004. ISBN: 9780471415268
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
فيزياء الجوامد، الجزءاألول والثاني والثالث، أ. د. عبد الفتاح الشاذلي، كتب عربية
www.kotobarabia.com
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Previous graduate students projects in the field of the course
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Scientific publishers web sites:
1- Elsevier (www.sciencedirect.com)
2- Springerlink (www.springerlink.com)
3- Institute of physics (www.iop.org)
4- John Wiley (www.wiley.com)
5- http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mgaafar/
6- hazemsakeek.com
7- http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/hph.html 5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
1- Scientific videos in youtube (www.youtube.com).
2- Microsoft office for editing reports and graduate projects.
3-Origin pro software for making figures of the scientific research projects.
4-Math editing software for writing derivations.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Classrooms needs to be prepared for at least 30 students, therefore they should have at least 30
seats for students.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
1- Smart Board.
2- Promethean software of the smart board.
3-Data show to help the smart board.
4-Laptop for presentations.
5-Microsoft office.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
N/A
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
1- Questionnaires to students on the course evaluation.
2- Questionnaires to students on the exam evaluation.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
1- Questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
2- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
3- Questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer evaluation.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
1- Periodical revisions on the courses specifications, reports and evaluations of the instructors.
2- Continuous training courses on teaching improvements for staff members.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
1- Revisions and evaluations of the courses, student home works, examinations by independent
members from other institutions.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Continuous observations on the following processes:
1- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
2- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
3- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer
evaluation in order to improve the course according to the needs of the outer community.
4- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to the student needs in order to improve the
course according to the needs of the students.
5- Observation on the student results from examinations.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar__________
Signature: __M. Gaafar _________________ Date Report Completed: ___19/6/1435 H_
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution: Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department: College of Science in AlZulfi/ Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Nuclear Physics lab. PHYS 498
2. Credit hours:3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Undergraduate Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th /fourth year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) Nuclear Physics I // PHYS 381
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) Not Applicable
8. Location if not on main campus: College of Science in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The course is available via my webpage. The model of instructor is distributed and used two items
above.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
17. To familiarize students with the basic knowledge of ionizing radiation properties.
18. To develop the students' understanding of the radiation detectors (gas filled, scintillation and
semiconductor).
19. To develop the students' knowledge of nuclear radiation interaction with matter and its practical
application.
20. To improve students experimental capabilities and skills.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Through coursework and workgroups, students are expected to cultivate the following
attitudes and dispositions:
1. Confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge.
2. Desire for continuous and independent learning.
√
√
40
60
3. Appreciation for the dynamic role of experimental nuclear physics in science.
4. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
5. Increased use of IT and web based reference material.
6. Changes in content as a result of new research in the field.
7. Adapting the contents to the level of the students and the number registered in the section.
8. Adapting the course to the students' specialties.
I use information technology to view and illustrate the concepts of physics means.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or
Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct h
ou
rs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Rep
ort
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Introduction (report lab.)
Safety notes - - 4 4 - - - - 4
Rutherford Scattering - - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4 Determining the half-life of a 137Ba sample by computer and digital counter.
- - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Counting statistics (Statistical nature of Radioactive decay law) - - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Gamma spectroscopy using NaI(Tl) detector and multichannel analyser (MCA) and absorption.
- - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Nuclear magnetic resonance - - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Recording a beta spectrum with a scintillation counter - - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Alpha particle spectroscopy and determining the energy loss of alpha particles
- - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Compton effect
- - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Law of distance and absorption of gamma or beta rays by Geiger counter
- - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Deflection of beta rays in the magnetic field. - - 4 4 0.5 0.5 2 0.4 7.4
Seminar - - - 4 2
Review - - 4 4 - - - - 4
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total - - 48 54 5 5 20 4 88
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours
N/A N/A 48 N/A 40 88
Credit N/A N/A 1.09 N/A 0.91 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. 2 hours weekly for the homework and pre-laboratory reports assignments.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
1) A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended.
2) A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
3) The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 List Radionuclides and their properties.
2. Homework
assignments.
3. Experiments theory
discussions.
4. Laboratory activity
(conducting
experiments and
writing reports).
1. In laboratory short
quizzes.
2. Oral and final
practical exams.
3. Evaluation of lab
reports.
4. Seminar.
1.2 Outline Ionizing radiation; their types and properties.
1.3 Describe Interaction of ionizing radiation with matter, interaction of ionizing radiation with matter, radiation detectors, experimental data reporting and treatment.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Solve problems on radiation detector properties (e.g.
operating voltage, attenuation coefficient, and others).
5) Learn theoretical
bases for
experiments.
6) Discussing
1. In laboratory short
quizzes.
2. Checking the
practical reports. 2.2 Radioactive materials handling methods and radiation
protection.
2
2.3 Statistical treatment of experimental data.
experiments theory
and methods.
7) Practical work and
discussing results.
3. Seminar.
4. Final practical exam.
2.4 Radiation spectrometry.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Justify to complete assignments in due time. 1. I encourage the student
to attend lectures regularly
by giving bonus marks for
attendance, give students
tasks, and ask questions
about previous lectures.
2. I apply educational
standards and behavioral
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit
and good character.
3. I enable students to
communicate with me
discuss any needs they
have related to the course,
and I welcome students'
comments when they face
challenging problems.
8) Take attendance
9) Class discussions
10) Grade quizzes.
11) Respect deadlines.
12) Give clear and
logical arguments.
13) Show active class
participation.
14) Perform serious on
monthly and final
exams.
15) Laboratory exams.
16) Assessment of the
laboratory reports.
17) Grading homework
assignments.
18) Seminars.
19) Final exam.
3.2 Analyze participations in class discussion and think
critically.
3.3 Show acting responsibly and ethically in carrying
out individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Work independently and as part of a team and
communicate results of work to others.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Use the computer for analysing and processing the
experimental data.
1. Writing laboratory reports.
2. Incorporating the use and
utilization of computer in the
course requirements.
Evaluating and discussing the
laboratory written reports.
4.2 Student use computational tools.
4.3 Students report writing.
4.4 Students use information technology in the classroom.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Use experimental tools to do nuclear experiments
demonstrate, show, illustrate, perform, dramatize,
employ, manipulate, operate, prepare, produce,
draw, diagram, examine, construct, assemble,
experiment, and reconstruct
1. Writing laboratory reports.
2. Incorporating the use and
utilization of computer in the
course requirements.
3. Final practical
exams.
4. Evaluation of lab
reports.
5.2 Draw table and plot graphs by office program.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Students will learn to
do the nuclear physics
experiments.
List nuclear detectors.
1,12
1,2
a, b, e
Describe Rutherford experiment.
10
4,5
b, c, h
Do the half-life of a 137Ba sample by
computer and digital counter
experiment.
8,10
3,4
f, h, i
Students are expected
to use nuclear lab. to
get different
experimental
techniques.
Find attenuation coefficient of Al.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Identify gamma spectrum by
scintillation detector.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Apply nuclear magnetic resonances
to find g factor.
6,10,21
2
e, k, n
Students are expected
to familiar with
different types of
nuclear radiations.
Classify nuclear radiations.
1, 11, 12
7
d, i
Compare between alpha and gamma
sources.
10
1,3
o
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet.
12
12
i, m, n,
o
Students are expected
to classify nuclear
detectors.
Compare among scintillation,
semiconductor and gas detectors.
2
2,3
k, n, o
Classify nuclear detectors.
1, 11
4,5
o
Describe scintillation counter.
13
6, 15
o
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 Seminars 13 20%
2 Second exam* -
3 Lab. Exam. Report. Every week 20%
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week) Four office hours per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks: Nuclear Laboratory notes
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3) Radiation Detection and Measurement, G.F. Knoll, 4th
Edition, 2010.
4) Introductory Nuclear Physics, K.S. Krane, 2nd
edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1988.
5) Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6th
edition
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) 2992دليل المعمل في العلوم النووية، مريم عتيق و محمد الدغمة، منشورات جامعة الفاتح، الطبعة االولى،
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
Nuclear Physics Labs
American Physical Society, Division of Nuclear Physics
European Infrastructure Network: Frontiers in Nuclear Physics
Table of Isotopes WWW service
http://vlib.org/physics.html
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software: 1. Mathematica and Microsoft programs are used to write and plot graphs.
2. Multimedia associated with the relevant websites.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab., internet lab and calculator.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list): 1. Availability of equipment relevant to the course material. 2. Safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching Student evaluation electronically is organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 19. Course report.
20. Program report.
21. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
41- Course Evaluation.
42- Exam Evaluation.
43- Improvement plan.
44- Program Outlearning with course outlearning.
45- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: Dr. Thamer Alharbi
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 10/4/2014
College/Department : College of Science / Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Training Course (PHYS 499)
2. Credit hours: 2 Credit Hours (0+2+0).
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Bachelor of Physics (BSc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course:
Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
level / 4th
year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): PHYS 495
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any): ---
8. Location if not on main campus:
Complex of colleges in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The other 50 % is conducted in the laboratory.
The percentages may change depending on the type of training is intended by the instructor.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
In this course, the student will be prepared to do a scientific research and write its report. Based
on the specialization of the instructor the student’s work will be in one or more of the main fields
of physics: Classical mechanics, thermodynamics, solid state physics, energy, nuclear physics,
electronics, quantum mechanics, and atomic physics.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the
field)
√
√
50 - 75
25 - 50
25 - 50
√
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Wo
rk L
oa
d
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b.
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
La
b.
rep
ort
s
Dis
cuss
ion
Collecting data 20 -
30
20 -
30 5
25 - 35
Mid-term 1
Data processing and analyzing 20 -
30
20 -
30 10 10 5
45 - 55
Mid-term 2
Writing the final report 30 30 30
Final Exam
Total 70 -
90
70 -
90 10 10 10
100 -
120
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 10 60 60
Credit -- 2 2
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains and Course Learning
Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
2 hours
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
To write research report. Relate the experiments to
the theories. To explain and justify the results
obtained from the experiment.
Practical training Progress evaluation by the
instructor
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Shows professional commitment to
ethical practice.
Awareness of time
management.
Lab. demonstrations.
Respecting deadlines.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
In-lab. evaluation
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 To communicate with the teacher using
communications technology. Encourage the student
to use program
software
Lab. demonstrations.
correspondences.
E-learning.
Project report 4.2
To use software programs in writing, inserting and
analyzing data, and plotting graphs.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 To operate the experiment and any attached
computer correctly and accurately. Lab. demonstrations.
Project report.
Progress evaluation 5.2
To measure the different physical parameters in the
laboratory professionally and accurately.
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Write an authentic scientific
report, based on the data
collected in this project.
To write research report. Relate the
experiments to the theories. To explain and
justify the results obtained from the
experiment.
c, d 4, 5,6 c, j, r
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Shows professional
commitment to ethical practice.
c, d, f 4, 5, 10 d, e
To communicate with the teacher using
communications technology. c, d, h 7, 9, 10 p, e, f, j
Present the data
professionally in a seminar
talk.
To use software programs in writing,
inserting and analyzing data, and plotting
graphs. h, e 11, 12, 13 p, e, k, l, r
To operate the experiment and any attached
computer correctly and accurately f, k, h, i, j 14 k, p, j
To measure the different physical
parameters in the laboratory professionally
and accurately. f, k, j 14 g, p, j
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 Collecting and analyzing data 1 - 9 20 %
2 Writing report 12 20 %
3 Submitting report 13 --
4 Seminar 14 60 %
5 Total
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the supervisor assigned for each student.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Based on the title of the project the textbook (if any) will be assigned by the instructor.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Any reference that is related or assigned by the instructor.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Based on the title of the project the textbook (if any) will be assigned by the instructor.
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Any electronic reference that is related or assigned by the instructor.
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Excel software for drawing graphs in the lab.
Word office for writing reports.
Any additional software needed for the project.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
A laboratory if the project is experimental (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
All classrooms and laboratories are equipped with internet, smart boards and its running software
‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for both classrooms and laboratories.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of all the faculty members is assigned for the project to review and discuss the
project.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
Signature: Date Report Completed: 12/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Al-harbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
6- Elective Department Requisites
Course
Code
Course
Number Course
Credit
Hours
Pre-
requisite Observations
PHYS 213 Introduction to
astronomy 2 (2+1+1) --
PHYS 334 Health Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 202
PHYS 333 Laser Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 351
PHYS 361 Biophysics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 202
PHYS 405 Computational physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 302
PHYS 435 Plasma Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 322
PHYS 462 Medical Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 472 Solid state physics 2 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 471
PHYS 403 Mathematical physics 3 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 302
PHYS 473 Semiconductors 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 471
PHYS 474 Materials Science 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 471
PHYS 476 Renewable energy 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 471
PHYS 482 Nuclear physics 2 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 485 Radiation Physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 487 Neutron Physics and
Reactors 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 484 Elementary particle
physics 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 481
PHYS 476 Nanotechnology 2 (2+1+1) PHYS 471
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code Introduction to astronomy physics // Phys213
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 7th
level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 202
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
23. What is the main purpose for this course?
This course provides a broad overview of Astronomy and our place in the Cosmos. It covers the
solar system and its exploration, stars, galaxies and cosmology, the Earth as a habitable planet,
and the search for life elsewhere in the universe. The course is delivered partially on the internet
through D2L system. The course is suitable as an introductory course for science students or as
a general education course for non-scientists
x
x 20
80
24. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
25. Update the content periodically.
26. Using new references.
27. Using web references.
28. increase use of IT
29. increase use of video material
30. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
Increased use of power-point and projector in class
31. Giving class lectures to summarize course content.
32. Solving problems and examples.
33. Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered. Solving the
monthly tests and discussion to take advantage of mistakes.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours T
ota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Introduction: modern astrophysics – History of
astronomy. Laws of motion: Kepler laws 3 - - 3 2 1 2 1 9
Kepler laws – Gravitational law – newton’s modified
law – Orbits of planets – speed in the orbit –
proceeding velocity
6 - - 6 2 1 3 2 14
2 - - 2 - 2
Solar system: planets: 1- Earth-like planets: Mercury
- Venus - Earth - Mars. universe. 6 - - 6 3 2 3 2 16
2 - giant planets (like Jupiter): Jupiter - Saturn -
Uranus - Neptune. 3 - satellites - the rings - comets -
asteroids.
6 - - 6 3 2 3 4 18
2 - - 2 2
. Stars: Stars dimensions - Destiny - Luminosity -
spectrum types - HR form - double stars and stars
masses. Evolution of stars.
9 - - 9 5 3 4 2 23
Galaxies: Milky Way - types of galaxies - galaxies
properties - anomalies galaxies - galaxies crowds - 9 - - 9 5 3 3 2 22
the universe.
types of galaxies - galaxies properties - anomalies
galaxies - galaxies crowds - the universe. 3 - - 3 6 3 4 2 18
Exam 2 - - 2 2
48 - - 48 26 15 22 15 126
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 48 78 126
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
13. Upon completion of this course students should be able to describe the Big Bang,
explain the age and origin of the Solar System and illustrate differences between Earth
and other planets in the Solar System. Importantly, students will have gained the
scientific basis to summarize conditions necessary for life and to assess scientific
evidence for life on other planets.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Students should be able to describe the Big
Bang, Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Explain the age and origin of the Solar System
1.3 Illustrate differences between Earth and other
planets in the Solar System.
1.4
1.5
3.5
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
Importantly, students will have gained the
scientific basis to summarize conditions
necessary for life and to assess scientific
evidence for life on other planets.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2
2.3
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
To improve the critical thinking skills of the
graduate students.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2
3.3
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Upon completion of this
course students should be
able to describe the Big
Bang, explain the age and
origin of the Solar System
and illustrate differences
between Earth and other
planets in the Solar System.
Develop and appreciation of the
workings, wonder, and beauty of the
solar system
1, 2 1 a, b
6. Develop and appreciation of the workings,
wonder, and beauty of the solar system
8,9 2,3 b,
7. Develop and appreciation of the workings,
wonder, and beauty of the solar system
3,4 1,3
c, h
8. Develop and appreciation of the workings,
wonder, and beauty of the solar system
2,4 3 C, h
Learn the basic solar system
concepts and principles,
astronomical universe (G. E. 4,
7)
7 6,7 H,f
astronomical universe (G. E. 4,
7)
8,9 8 g
astronomical universe (G. E. 4,
7)
6,7 9 h
astronomical universe (G. E. 4,
7)
10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
• Build a foundation for future study in
astronomy (G. E. 3, 7) 12,18 10,12 J,k
• Build a foundation for future study in
astronomy (G. E. 3, 7) 14,17 13 i
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Introduction to astronomy (B. bataynah,2009
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
28. Course report.
29. Program report.
30. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 56- Course Evaluation
57- Exam Evaluation
58- Improvement plan
59- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
60- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb____________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 10/6/1435 H
College/Department: College of Science – Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Health physics – PHYS-334
2. Credit hours: 3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 3rd
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): General physics 2 (PHYS – 202)
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The instruction is taken place by traditional classroom, through my home page on the university
web site, smart boards, scientific discussions and scientific videos from the internet.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
The student expected to understand:
21. Principles of Health physics.
22. Basic applications.
23. Brief description for plans concerning course developments such as; the use of
materials, references depending on internet network and search works).
24. Seeking for recent research works relevant to the course.
25. Making workshops at the department.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Periodical physics department meetings every 2 years to review the courses according to the
reports of the internal reviewers from the department and the feedback from students in the
80%
10%
10%
course evaluation questionnaire. Also, the use of the trusted physics web sites for the students
during making their reports and presentations.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
1. Topics to be Covered
List of Topics No. of
Weeks
Contact Hours
Review of the sources of radiation, basic dosimetry, and hazards of
ionizing radiation, Radiation safety guides and codes in the
environment, industry, medical and nuclear facilities.
2 6
Radioactivity and transformation mechanisms, Alpha emission, Beta
emission, Positron emission, Orbital electron capture, Gamma rays,
Internal conversion.
2 6
Transformation kinetics, Half life, Average life. Activity, The
Becquerel, The Curie, Specific activity.
2 6
Interaction of radiation with matter, Beta rays (Range-Energy
relationship), mechanisms of energy loss (Ionization and excitation,
Bremsstrahlung), Alpha rays (Range-Energy relationship), Gamma
rays (Exponential absorption), interaction mechanisms (Pair
production, Compton scattering Photoelectric absorption,
Photodisintegration), Neutrons (Production, Interaction, Scattering
and Absorption).
3 9
Radiation dosimetry, Absorbed dose (Gray and Rad), Exposure
(Roentgen), Exposure-dose relationship.
2 6
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study T
ota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Internet Library Homewo
rk
Discussi
ons
Review of the sources of
radiation, basic dosimetry,
and hazards of ionizing
radiation, Radiation safety
guides and codes in the
environment, industry,
medical and nuclear
facilities.
6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Radioactivity and
transformation mechanisms,
Alpha emission, Beta
6 - - 6 2 1.5 2 3 14.5
emission, Positron emission,
Orbital electron capture,
Gamma rays, Internal
conversion.
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Transformation kinetics,
Half life, Average life.
Activity, The Becquerel,
The Curie, Specific activity.
6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Interaction of radiation
with matter, Beta rays
(Range-Energy
relationship).
3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Mechanisms of energy loss
(Ionization and excitation,
Bremsstrahlung), Alpha rays
(Range-Energy
relationship), Gamma rays
(Exponential absorption),
interaction mechanisms
(Pair production, Compton
scatteringPhotoelectric
absorption,
Photodisintegration),
Neutrons (Production,
Interaction, Scattering and
Absorption).
9 - - 9 6 6 6 6 33
Radiation dosimetry,
Absorbed dose (Gray and
Rad), Exposure (Roentgen),
Exposure-dose relationship.
6 - - 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 16
Review 3 - - 3 4 4 4 4.5 19.5
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 21.5 20 20.5 25 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Principles of health physics Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
internet web sites
Report, presentation or
homework
1.2 Radioactive materials
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Exams and quizzes
1.3 Basic scientific and experimental background
on radiation protection.
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
1.4 Transformation kinetics, Half life, Average life.
Activity, The Becquerel, The Curie, Specific
activity.
Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
discussions
Exams and quizzes
1.5 Interaction of radiation with matter Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Differentiate between radioactive non-
radioactive materials.
Traditional classroom,
discussions and internet
web sites
Exams and quizzes
2.2 Differentiate between types of radiations. Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and quizzes
2.3 Know the different types of protection from
radioactive materials.
Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and discussions
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Choose to work in a group and learn time
management.
Encouragement of the
student to attend lectures
regularly by giving bonus
marks for attendance, give
students tasks, and ask
questions about previous
lectures.
Quizzes
3.2 Demonstrate how to search for information
through library and internet.
Mutual respect is between
the lecturer and students and
among students themselves. I
deal with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
Discussions
3.3 Justify a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language.
Application of educational
standards and behavioural
control when they work in
Report
6 hours on average
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit and
good character.
3.4 Self confidence in demonstrating presentations Encouragement of the
student to have the ability
to make presentations and
oral discussions with his
colleges
Presentations
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Ability to communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Solving problems on smart
board.
Discussions
4.2 Dealing with confidence with differential equations,
integrations, and differentials. Although this skill is not
taught within the course, it is necessary to deal with him.
Group assignments,
homeworks and encouraging
group projects
Home works and
presentations
4.3 Using information technology in the classroom and
library. Encouraging reports and
presentations
Reports and presentations
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 N/A
5.2 N/A
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project, examination, speech,
oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1
Quizze 1 Week 3 5
2
Mid-Term exam 1 Week 6 20
3
Quizze 2 Week 9 5
4
Med-term exam 2 Week 11 20
5
Presentations and reports During the
semester
5
6
Attending lectures During the
semester
5
7
Final exam Week 15 40
8
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least, there are three hours for academic advice and consultations for students per week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks 1-Herman Cember and Thomas E. Johnson, Introduction to Health Physics, Pergamon Press. Fourth Edition, 2009, Mac Graw Hill, ISBN: 978-0-07-164-323-8.
2-Michael G. Stabin, Radiation Protection and Dosimetry – An Introduction to Health Physics, Springer, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-387-49982-6, e-ISBN: 978-0-387-49982-3.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.) Joseph John Bevelacqua, Contemporary Health Physics – Problems and Solutions, Second Edition, 2009, Wiley – VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, ISBN: 978-3-527-40824-5.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) 1-Herman Cember and Thomas E. Johnson, Introduction to Health Physics, Pergamon Press.
Fourth Edition, 2009, Mac Graw Hill, ISBN: 978-0-07-164-323-8. 2-Michael G. Stabin, Radiation Protection and Dosimetry – An Introduction to Health Physics, Springer, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-387-49982-6, e-ISBN: 978-0-387-49982-3.
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Scientific publishers web sites:
8- Elsevier (www.sciencedirect.com)
9- Springerlink (www.springerlink.com)
10- Institute of physics (www.iop.org)
11- John Wiley (www.wiley.com)
12- http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mgaafar/
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
1- Scientific videos in youtube (www.youtube.com).
2- Microsoft office for editing reports and graduate projects.
3-Origin pro software for making figures of the scientific research projects.
4-Math editing software for writing derivations.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Classrooms needs to be prepared for at least 30 students, therefore they should have at least 30
seats for students.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
1- Smart Board.
2- Promethean software of the smart board.
3-Data show to help the smart board.
4-Laptop for presentations.
5-Microsoft office.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
N/A
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
3- Questionnaires to students on the course evaluation.
4- Questionnaires to students on the exam evaluation.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
4- Questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
5- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
6- Questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer evaluation.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
3- Periodical revisions on the courses specifications, reports and evaluations of the instructors.
4- Continuous training courses on teaching improvements for staff members.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
1- Revisions and evaluations of the courses, student home works, examinations by independent
members from other institutions.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Continuous observations on the following processes:
6- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
7- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
8- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer
evaluation in order to improve the course according to the needs of the outer community.
9- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to the student needs in order to improve the
course according to the needs of the students.
10- Observation on the student results from examinations.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar__________
Signature: __M. Gaafar _________________ Date Report Completed: ___13/6/1435 H_
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Course Specifications
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Laser Physics // Phys 333
2. Credit hours: 2 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Abdu Idris Omer
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Elective
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): PHYS 351
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
18. What is the main purpose for this course?
Generally speaking, the study of electronics is considered to be the base of the modern
revolution of industrial, communication, control and many other aspects in our life.
The course outline as:
1- To study the principles of Absorption and Emission of light, Einstein Relations,
Population inversion, Gain coefficient
2- To study Optical resonator, Laser Modes, solid state lasers.
3- To make the student be able to understand the basic of Laser beam properties,: Line
width, Divergence, coherence, Brightness
x
x 20
80
2- Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
19. Update the content periodically.
20. Having great confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge. 21. Using new references.
22. Using web references.
23. Willing for continuous and independent learning.
24. increase use of video material
25. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
26. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
.Absorption and Emission of light, Einstein Relations,
Population inversion, Gain coefficient, 4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Optical resonator, Laser Modes, solid state lasers,
4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - - 2
semiconductor lasers, Gas lasers, Dye lasers,
4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Free electron laser and some new lasers. 4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 - 2
Laser beam properties,: Line width, Divergence,
coherence, Brightness,
4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Focusing properties of laser, Q- switching, Frequency
doubling, Phase conjugation. Applications: medical,
industrial, Military, Scientific, Holography and
compunctions..
4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Review 4 - - 4 1 - 1 1 11
Final Exam - - - -
Total 28 - - 32 7 - 7 7 81
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit
Contact Hours
Self study
Other:
Total Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
ECTS
2 28 - - -
21 32 81
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
14. A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
15. A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or
skill;
16. The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Knowledge in basic sciences, mathematics, and
laser principles.
Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
Knowledge in the fundamentals of laser principles
and practices, including analysis, evaluation, and
management.
1.3
An understanding of the professional and ethical
responsibility of laser profession.
1.4
Understanding of the role of laser and impact of
laser in global context.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2
2.1
Collect data and information and perform
analysis, interpretation and draw inferences or
conclusions
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2
Perform in-depth study and analysis of laser
problems, and find innovative or creative
solutions based on economy, feasibility and
safety.
2.3
Evaluate alternative designs and solutions, with
an understanding of the impact of the
proposed solution.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1
The students will have the ability to work
constructively in groups.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
English.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2
Students should be responsible for their own
learning that requires using means to find new
information data, or techniques of analysis.
3.3
The students should be aware of ethical and
professional issues involving values and moral
judgments in ways that are sensitive to others
and consistent with underlying values and
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will have the ability to communicate
in English both orally and in writing.
Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2
Student will have sufficient knowledge in
information technology that will enable them to
gather, interpret, and communicate information
and ideas.
4.3
Students will have sufficient background in
statistical or mathematical techniques that will
enable them to apply in interpreting and
proposing solutions.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Understand basic laser
physics, Describe the
concept of stimulated
emission and what is
an active medium.
Knowledge in basic sciences, mathematics,
and electronic principles. 1, 2,6, 1 a, b
Knowledge in the fundamentals of
electronic principles and practices,
including analysis, design, evaluation, and
management.
8,9 2,3 b,
An understanding of the professional and
ethical responsibility of electronic
profession.
3 1
c, h
2,4 3 C, h
Differentiate between
the concepts of energy
versus power.
Describe the difference
between average power
and peak power
Collect data and information and
perform analysis, interpretation and
draw inferences or conclusions
7 6,7 H,f
Perform in-depth study and analysis of
electronic problems, and find innovative
or creative solutions based on economy,
feasibility and safety
8,9 8 g
Evaluate alternative designs and
solutions, with an understanding of the
impact of the proposed solution
6,7 9 h
14 11 gh
Understand the three
different laser emission
modes and their role in
peak power and
thermal effects on
target tissue.
Understand the impact
of pulse duration on
peak power and
thermal effects on
target tissue.
The students will have the ability to
work constructively in groups.
12, 10 J,k
Students should be responsible for their
own learning that requires using means
to find new information data, or
techniques of analysis.
14,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam 12 10%
4 Presentation One/ semester
10%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Lasers: principles and applications, J.Wi1son and J.F.B. Hawkes, Prentice
Hall, 1992
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
22- Lasers: principles and applications, J.Wi1son and J.F.B. Hawkes, Prentice 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Audio Visual electronic laboratory provided with data show and projector system.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer lab for laser applications and simulation. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Regular evaluation of the theoretical and practical parts of the course to identify the weaknesses
areas
Performance appraisal form filled up by each student to show level of fulfillment
Confidential completion of standard course evaluation questionnaire
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
A statistical regular review and analysis of the students’ achievement in the department.
Prepare a questionnaire which should be filled by the students at the end of the term.
The questionnaire should be after that analyzed and carefully studied.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Provide training and workshop opportunities for the teaching staff to improve their teaching
strategies.
Form committees to follow up progress and work on improvement.
Provide opportunities to improve academic courses and research through conferences.
Provide the teaching staff members with all the references and electronic resources.
Updating through more reading books and articles related to the course
Improve relations between instructor and students.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching staff in
addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course should be developed
periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study. Development could be put as an
objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Student’s feedback on the quality of the course.
Consulting other faculty members or collaborators in overseas universities for their views on the
method of quality of improvement
Check other universities web sites to compare our lectures with them
Compare the syllabus with the syllabus of standard universities.
Form a specialized committee from the department to review the progress of teaching and update
the resources
Consult distinguished students and discuss with them positive and negative points in Lectures.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ___Abdu Idris Omer
__________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _13-6-1435______________
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 20/6/1435 H
College/Department: College of Science – Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Biophysics – PHYS-361
2. Credit hours: 3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Khaled Ben Abdessalem
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8rd
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): General physics 2 (PHYS – 202)
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The instruction is taken place by traditional classroom, through my home page on the university
web site, smart boards, scientific discussions and scientific videos from the internet.
B Objectives
80%
10%
10%
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
The student expected to understand: 26. The student should have a firm grasp of fundamental principles of biophysics. Students
should be able to simplify and model biological systems in a physically reasonable and
tractable fashion.
27. Utilize the formal and mathematical techniques learnt in the course to predict various
properties of the biological system at hand.
28. Be able to then verbally and in writing communicate what their predictions mean in a real
laboratory or natural setting.
29. They should also have a good understanding of the various experimental and
computational techniques of biophysics and be able to identify relevant techniques to
address specific biophysical problems.
30. They should also have gained the ability to follow current research and literature in
biophysics.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Periodical physics department meetings every 2 years to review the courses according to the
reports of the internal reviewers from the department and the feedback from students in the
course evaluation questionnaire. Also, the use of the trusted physics web sites for the students
during making their reports and presentations.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Internet Library Homewo
rk
Discussi
ons
Biomechanics Forces effects
on our bodies. Vector analysis.
Levers and equilibrium of rigid
bodies.
6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Stress-strain curve. Young's
and Shear modulus for
materials and biological
tissues. Stress-Strain Curve -
Young’s and Shear Modulus
for materials and applications.
6 - - 6 2 1.5 2 3 14.5
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Stress-strain curve. Young's
and Shear modulus for
materials and biological
tissues. Stress-Strain Curve -
Young’s and Shear Modulus
for materials and applications.
6 - - 6 2.5 2 2 3 15.5
Properties of Fluid. Viscosity
and Surface tension.
Bernoulli’s Equation and its
applications. Effect of gravity
and acceleration on blood
pressure.
3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Nervous system. And
electricity within the body.
Equilibrium potential and
Nernst equation. Factors
affecting the propagation of
action potential. Action
potential measurements of
some organs; EGG, EEG and
ERG.
9 - - 9 6 6 6 6 33
Nonionizing Radiation,
Physical and biological effects. 6 - - 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 16
Review 3 - - 3 4 4 4 4.5 19.5
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 21.5 20 20.5 25 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Principles of Biophysics Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
Report, presentation or
homework
6 hours on average
internet web sites
1.2 Biomechanics materials and bio-fluid
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Exams and quizzes
1.3 Basic scientific and experimental background on
Biophysics.
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
1.4 Nervous system. And electricity within the body.
Action potential measurements of some organs;
EGG, EEG and ERG..
Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
discussions
Exams and quizzes
1.5 Nonionizing Radiation, Physical and biological
effects.
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Describe the structure and functions of the
autonomic nervous system
Traditional classroom,
discussions and internet
web sites
Exams and quizzes
2.2 Understand the general components of vascular
system and it function.
Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and quizzes
2.3 Know the general mechanisms of motion and
distinct the different types lever.
Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and discussions
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Choose to work in a group and learn time
management.
Encouragement of the
student to attend lectures
regularly by giving bonus
marks for attendance, give
students tasks, and ask
questions about previous
lectures.
Quizzes
3.2 Demonstrate how to search for information through
library and internet.
Mutual respect is between
the lecturer and students and
among students themselves. I
deal with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
Discussions
3.3 Justify a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language.
Application of educational
standards and behavioural
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit and
good character.
Report
3.4 Self confidence in demonstrating presentations Encouragement of the
student to have the ability
to make presentations and
oral discussions with his
colleges
Presentations
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Ability to communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Solving problems on smart
board.
Discussions
4.2 Dealing with confidence with differential equations,
integrations, and differentials. Although this skill is not
taught within the course, it is necessary to deal with him.
Group assignments,
homework's and encouraging
group projects
Home works and
presentations
4.3 Using information technology in the classroom and
library. Encouraging reports and
presentations
Reports and presentations
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 N/A
5.2 N/A
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project, examination, speech,
oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1
Quizze 1 Week 3 5
2
Mid-Term exam 1 Week 6 20
3
Quizze 2 Week 9 5
4
Med-term exam 2 Week 11 20
5
Presentations and reports During the
semester
5
6
Attending lectures During the
semester
5
7
Final exam Week 15 40
8
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least, there are three hours for academic advice and consultations for students per week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
Required: Biological Physics: Energy, Information, Life, Philip Nelson (W. H. Freeman; 1st
edition (June 15, 2007))
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Random Walks in Biology by Howard C. Berg
Physical Biology of the Cell by Rob Phillips
Molecular Driving Forces: Statistical Thermodynamics in Chemistry and Biology by Ken A. Dill 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Scientific publishers web sites:
13- Elsevier (www.sciencedirect.com)
14- Springerlink (www.springerlink.com)
15- Institute of physics (www.iop.org)
16- John Wiley (www.wiley.com)
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
1- Scientific videos in youtube (www.youtube.com).
2- Microsoft office for editing reports and graduate projects.
3- Origin pro software for making figures of the scientific research projects.
4- Math editing software for writing derivations.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Classrooms needs to be prepared for at least 30 students, therefore they should have at least 30
seats for students.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
1- Smart Board.
2- Promethean software of the smart board.
3- Data show to help the smart board.
4- Laptop for presentations.
5- Microsoft office.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
N/A
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
5- Questionnaires to students on the course evaluation.
6- Questionnaires to students on the exam evaluation.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
7- Questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
8- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
9- Questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer evaluation.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
5- Periodical revisions on the courses specifications, reports and evaluations of the instructors.
6- Continuous training courses on teaching improvements for staff members.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
1- Revisions and evaluations of the courses, student home works, examinations by independent
members from other institutions.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Continuous observations on the following processes:
11- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
12- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
13- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer
evaluation in order to improve the course according to the needs of the outer community.
14- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to the student needs in order to improve the
course according to the needs of the students.
15- Observation on the student results from examinations.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr. Khaled Ben Abdessalem__________
Signature: __K. B. Abdessalem _________________ Date Report Completed: ___20/6/1435 H_
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Computational Physics // Phys 405
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ibrahim Shaarany
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 305
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
34. What is the main purpose for this course?
The use of computers in physics has grown enormously in the twentieth and twenty-first
centuries, to the point where computers play a central role in virtually every new physics
discovery. From particle physics and astrophysics to quantum computing and biophysics,
calculations on computers have become one of the most indispensable tools of scientists today.
This course will give participants an introduction to the solution of physics problems using
computers. Assuming no previous computer programming experience, the course will
introduce the basic ideas and programming skills of computational physics and students will
develop their own computer software to solve problems in quantum physics,
electromagnetism, biophysics, mechanics, chaos, nonlinear dynamics, and other areas.
x
x 20
80
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
46. Update the content periodically.
47. Using new references.
48. Using web references.
49. increase use of IT
50. increase use of video material
51. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
52. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Introduction: Computation and Science, The emergence
of Modern 3 - - 3 2 1 2 1 9
Computers Computer Algorithms and Languages:
Applications: Newton and Kepler Laws. 6 - - 6 2 1 3 2 14
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 - 2
Numerical linear Algebra 6 - - 6 3 2 3 2 16
Systems of linear equations, Eigen values and Eigen
vectors. 6 - - 6 3 2 3 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
Interpolation, Extrapolation and Data Fitting: Polynomial
Interpolation, Data fitting, Least squares fitting. 9 - - 9 5 3 4 2 23
Ordinary differential equations: Initial-value problems,
The Euler and Picard methods, The Runge-Kutta method ,
Chaotic dynamics of the driven pendulum, Boundary -
value and eigenvalue problem, The one-dimensional
Schrödinger equation.
9 - - 9 5 3 3 2 22
Review 3 - - 3 6 3 4 2 18
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 26 15 22 15 126
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 48 78 126
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To learn the basics of scientific, numerical simulation and modelling. Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2
To understand why hard work and even properly functioning and powerful software and hardware do not guarantee meaningful results. In an experimental science there are limits to accuracy and applicability.
1.3 1.4
1.5
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
To use the graphical capabilities of advanced workstations to visualize numerical solutions into highly interpretable forms.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
To learn through direct experience the use of scientific workstations in thinking creatively and solving problems in the physical sciences.
2.2 To learn how to interpret and analyse data visually, both during and after computation.
2.3 To instil attitudes of independence, personal communication, and organization, all of which
4
are essential for mastery of complex systems.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 To learn to communicate effectively solution methods and results
3.4 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, communicate with each other and with
the instructor electronically, and periodically
visit the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Providing the student with
a repertoire of
mathematical methods that
are essential to the solution
List the types of Singularity of
differential equations a, b 1, 2 a, b
Understanding of how the power series
help in solving differential equations c, d, e 1, 2 c, d
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam 5-6 20 %
2 Second Exam 10-11 20 %
3 Final Exam 16 40 %
4 Seminar 14 5 %
7 Quizzes --
25 % 8 Homework --
9 Classwork --
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the academic advisor assigned for each student, or
of advanced problems
encountered in the fields of
physics.
solve the Legendre equation and
describe the Recurrence relations and
special properties of a Legendre
polynomial
c, d, e 4, 5, 6 e, f
understanding of the significance of
recurrence relations
Preparing the
student with mathematical t
ools and techniques that are
required in
advanced courses offered
in the physics.
Discriminating between the different
types polynomial equations g, h, i
7, 8, 9,
10 k, l
Applying Fourier transformation to
solve problems in physics g, h, i
7, 8, 9,
10 k
Contributing to group discussion j (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
Perform activities independently with
self-reliance. j (1, 3, 4, 5) 12, 13 P
Using of communications technology to
communicate with instructors and peers K (1 ,2, 3) 14 g
Using of software programs in solving
differential equations. K (1 ,2, 3) 14 i
from the unit of academic guidance.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
Computational Physics, Rubin H. Landau, Manuel J. Paez, and Cristian C. Bordeianu
(Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2007).
A First Course in Computational Physics, Paul L. DeVries and Javier E. Hasbun (Jones &
Bartlett, Burlington, MA, 2010).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Numerical Methods for Physics, 2nd Edition, Alejandro L. Garcia (Prentice Hall, Upper
Saddle River, NJ, 2000).
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Wolfram Research: http://functions.wolfram.com/
Digital Library of Mathematical Functions at NIST: http://dlmf.nist.gov/http://www.razi-
center.net/
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Matlab software for solving differential equations.
Mathematica software
C++ Compiler
F95 Compiler
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
1 classroom with the capacity of maximum 25 students is required. (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
The classroom is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for the classroom. The smart board connect to internet.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of maximum three faculty members are assigned for each subject to review the
checking of the first, second and final exams.
An internal revision report is written by the committee for each course.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Ibrahim Shaarany
Signature: Date Report Completed: 20/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Alharbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 10/6/1435 H
College/Department: College of Science – Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Solid State Physics II / PHYS-472
2. Credit hours: 3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
Level 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Solid State Physics I – PHYS - 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi 9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The instruction is taken place by traditional classroom, through my home page on the university
web site, smart boards, scientific discussions and scientific videos from the internet.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
1. The student will have the knowledge of the free electron theory (classical model of free
electron, Fermi gas of free electrons, Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution, Fermi-Dirac
distribution function).
2. Learn the statistical view of free electrons.
3. Understand the Semiconductor materials – Band theory in semiconductors – energy gap in
semiconductors – holes – Fermi level in semiconductor – effect of impurities on
semiconductors – applications).
4. Understand the magnetism in solid state – Superconductivity – Electrical properties of
semiconductors – Electrical and thermodynamic properties of semiconductors.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Periodical physics department meetings every 2 years to review the courses according to the
reports of the internal reviewers from the department and the feedback from students in the
course evaluation questionnaire. Also, the use of the trusted physics web sites for the students
80%
10%
10%
during making their reports and presentations.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin
or Handbook should be attached)
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
Tu
tori
als
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Free electron theory
(classical model of free
electron, Fermi gas of free
electrons, Maxwell-
Boltzmann distribution,
Fermi-Dirac distribution
function)
3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Statistical view of free
electrons - semiconductor
materials – Band theory
6 - - 6 3 3 2 2 16
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Semiconductors – energy
gap in semiconductors –
holes – Fermi level in
semiconductor – effect of
impurities on
semiconductors –
applications)
9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Magnetism in solid state 3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Superconductivity –
Electrical properties of
semiconductors – Electrical
and thermodynamic
properties of
semiconductors
9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Brillouin Zones, dielectric
and optical properties of
solids
9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Review 3 - - 3 4 4 4 4 19
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 20 20 19 21 128
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 N/A N/A N/A 86 128
Credit 0.984 N/A N/A N/A 2.016 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Memorize of the free-electron model and further details of the nearly-free electron
model of electronic structure; modifications
to the Fermi surface near zone boundaries. The tight binding method.
Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
internet web sites
Report, presentation or
homework
1.2 Describe and understanding of the semi-
classical dynamics of electrons in solids Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Exams and quizzes
1.3 recognize and understanding of the Fermi surface and how it is modified by the
presence of a weak crystal potential
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
1.4 Describe the microscopic origins of the magnetic and electrical properties of solids
and explain some ground-state and finite-
temperature properties of ferromagnets.
Traditional classroom,
group discussions and
discussions
Exams and quizzes
1.5 List the physical principles for different types of electric and magnetic phenomena in solid materials (like e.g. paraelectricity, dielectricity, ferroelectricity, superconductivity, paramagnetism, diamagnetism, ferromagnetism, antiferromagnetism etc) and in relevant cases relate this to macroscopically measured physical
quantities.
Traditional classroom and
scientific videos
Report, presentation or
homework
2.0 Cognitive Skills
6 hours on average
2.1 Estimate the Semiconductor materials – Band
theory in semiconductors – energy gap in
semiconductors – holes – Fermi level in
semiconductor – effect of impurities on
semiconductors – applications)
Traditional classroom,
discussions and internet
web sites
Exams and quizzes
2.2 Explain the magnetism in solid state –
Superconductivity – Electrical properties of
semiconductors – Electrical and
thermodynamic properties of semiconductors
Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and quizzes
2.3 Write the dielectric and optical properties of
solids
Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams and discussions
2.4 Predict the Brillouine Zones Traditional classroom,
discussions and library
Exams, reports or
presentation
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Choose to work in a group and learn time
management.
Encouragement of the
student to attend lectures
regularly by giving bonus
marks for attendance, give
students tasks, and ask
questions about previous
lectures.
Quizzes
3.2 Demonstrate how to search for information
through library and internet.
Mutual respect is between
the lecturer and students and
among students themselves. I
deal with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
Discussions
3.3 Justify a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language.
Application of educational
standards and behavioural
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit and
good character.
Report
3.4 Self confidence in demonstrating presentations Encouragement of the
student to have the ability
to make presentations and
oral discussions with his
colleges
Presentations
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Ability to communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Solving problems on smart
board.
Discussions
4.2 Dealing with confidence with differential equations,
integrations, and differentials. Although this skill is not
taught within the course, it is necessary to deal with him.
Group assignments,
homeworks and encouraging
group projects
Home works and
presentations
4.3 Using information technology in the classroom and
library. Encouraging reports and
presentations
Reports and presentations
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 N/A
5.2 N/A
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project, examination, speech,
oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1
Quizze 1 Week 3 5
2
Mid-Term exam 1 Week 6 20
3
Quizze 2 Week 9 5
4
Med-term exam 2 Week 11 20
5
Presentations and reports During the
semester
5
6
Attending lectures During the
semester
5
7
Final exam Week 15 40
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least, there are three hours for academic advice and consultations for students per week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Kittel, Charles. Introduction to Solid State Physics. 8th ed. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, 2004. ISBN: 9780471415268
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
فيزياء الجوامد، الجزء الثاني، أ. د. عبد الفتاح الشاذلي، كتب عربية
www.kotobarabia.com
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Previous graduate students projects in the field of the course
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Scientific publishers web sites:
17- Elsevier (www.sciencedirect.com)
18- Springerlink (www.springerlink.com)
19- Institute of physics (www.iop.org)
20- John Wiley (www.wiley.com)
21- http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mgaafar/
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
1- Scientific videos in youtube (www.youtube.com).
2- Microsoft office for editing reports and graduate projects.
3-Origin pro software for making figures of the scientific research projects.
4-Math editing software for writing derivations.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Classrooms needs to be prepared for at least 30 students, therefore they should have at least 30
seats for students.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
1- Smart Board.
2- Promethean software of the smart board.
3-Data show to help the smart board.
4-Laptop for presentations.
5-Microsoft office.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
7- Questionnaires to students on the course evaluation.
8- Questionnaires to students on the exam evaluation.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
10- Questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
11- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
12- Questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer evaluation.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
7- Periodical revisions on the courses specifications, reports and evaluations of the instructors.
8- Continuous training courses on teaching improvements for staff members.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
1- Revisions and evaluations of the courses, student home works, examinations by independent
members from other institutions.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
Continuous observations on the following processes:
16- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to students on the Instructor evaluation.
17- Internal revisions by the staff members on the courses and examinations.
18- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to job owners on the graduate employer
evaluation in order to improve the course according to the needs of the outer community.
19- Statistical data feedback from questionnaires to the student needs in order to improve the
course according to the needs of the students.
20- Observation on the student results from examinations.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: __Dr. Mohamed S. Gaafar__________
Signature: __M. Gaafar _________________ Date Report Completed: ___10/6/1435 H_
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Mathematical Physics 3 // Phys 403
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ibrahim Shaarany
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 302
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
x
x 20
80
B Objectives
35. What is the main purpose for this course?
The study of Mathematical Physics 3 has played a major role in the understanding the
mathematical structure of physics and in the development of our understanding of Physics .
The course outline as:
27. Series Method for solving linear differential equations, Singular Points of Differential
Equations and their Importance. 28. Series Methods (Frobenius). Legendre, Bessel, Hermit and Laguerre Differential
Equations. Legendre polynomials, Hermite polynomials, Lagurre polynomials, Bessel
Functions, Series Expansion of a Function in terms of a Complete Set of Legendre
Functions. 29. Bessel Functions: First and Second Kind, Zeros of Bessel Functions and Orthogonally,
Fourier transformation and its application, Laplace transformation and its
application, Solution of First and Second Order ODEs, Solution of Simultaneous First
Order ODEs, Solution of One-Dimensional PDEs : Wave and Diffusion Equations,
Evaluation of Definite Integrals, Eigenvalue problem, Differential equations of
Boundary value problem. 2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
53. Update the content periodically.
54. Using new references.
55. Using web references.
56. increase use of IT
57. increase use of video material
58. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
59. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
To
tal
of
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
Lab
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Series Method for solving linear differential equations 3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Singular Points of Differential Equations and their
Importance. 6 - - 6 3 3 2 2 16
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
Series Methods (Frobenius). Legendre, Bessel, Hermite
and Laguerre Differential Equations. 9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Legendre polynomials, Hermite polynomials, Lagurre
polynomials, Bessel Functions, Series Expansion of a
Function in terms of a Complete Set of Legendre
Functions.
3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Bessel Functions: First and Second Kind, Zeros of Bessel
Functions and Orthogonally, Fourier transformation and
its application, Laplace transformation and its application
9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Solution of First and Second Order ODEs, Solution of
Simultaneous First Order ODEs, Solution of One-
Dimensional PDEs : Wave and Diffusion Equations,
Evaluation of Definite Integrals, Eigenvalue problem,
Differential equations of Boundary value problem.
9 - - 9 3 3 3 3 21
Review 3 - - 3 4 4 4 4 19
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 20 20 19 21 128
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 N/A N/A N/A 86 128
Credit 0.984 N/A N/A N/A 2.016 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 List Series Method for solving linear differential
equations Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Describe theories of Series Method
1.3
Identify Bessel Functions: First and Second
Kind, Zeros of Bessel Functions and
Orthogonality, Fourier transformation, Laplace
41
transformation Team work
Exercises
1.4 Describe Series Expansion of a Function in
terms of a Complete Set of Legendre Functions
1.5
Memorize Bessel Functions, Legendre
Functions, Fourier transformation, Laplace
transformation
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Collect general information about Series Method
for solving linear differential equations
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Use the Series Method for solving physical
problems.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical knowledge to any
physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through
library and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, communicate with each other and with
the instructor electronically, and periodically
visit the sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam 5-6 20 %
2 Second Exam 10-11 20 %
3 Final Exam 16 40 %
4 Seminar 14 5 %
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Providing the student with
a repertoire of
mathematical methods that
are essential to the solution
of advanced problems
encountered in the fields of
physics.
List the types of Singularity of
differential equations a, b 1, 2 a, b
Understanding of how the power series
help in solving differential equations c, d, e 1, 2 c, d
solve the Legendre equation and
describe the Recurrence relations and
special properties of a Legendre
polynomial
c, d, e 4, 5, 6 e, f
understanding of the significance of
recurrence relations
Preparing the
student with mathematical t
ools and techniques that are
required in
advanced courses offered
in the physics.
Discriminating between the different
types polynomial equations g, h, i
7, 8, 9,
10 k, l
Applying Fourier transformation to
solve problems in physics g, h, i
7, 8, 9,
10 k
Contributing to group discussion j (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
Perform activities independently with
self-reliance. j (1, 3, 4, 5) 12, 13 P
Using of communications technology to
communicate with instructors and peers K (1 ,2, 3) 14 g
Using of software programs in solving
differential equations. K (1 ,2, 3) 14 i
7 Quizzes --
25 % 8 Homework --
9 Classwork --
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the academic advisor assigned for each student, or
from the unit of academic guidance.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
"Mathematical Methods for Physicists" by G.B. Arfken and H.J. Weber (Academic Press, 2001)
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Wolfram Research: http://functions.wolfram.com/
Digital Library of Mathematical Functions at NIST: http://dlmf.nist.gov/http://www.razi-
center.net/
Open problems in Mathematical Physics:
http://www.math.princeton.edu/~aizenman/OpenProblems.iamp/ 5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Matlab software for solving differential equations.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Classroom with the capacity of maximum 25 students is required. (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
The classroom is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for the classroom. The smart board connect to internet.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of maximum three faculty members are assigned for each subject to review the
checking of the first, second and final exams.
An internal revision report is written by the committee for each course.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Ibrahim Shaarany
Signature: Date Report Completed: 20/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Alharbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 17-4-2014 (17/6/1435)
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Semiconductor Physics // PHYS 473
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs):
BS-Physics, 4 Years Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Optional (7 and 8) / 4th
Year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Solid State Physics -1: PHYS 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Department of Physics, Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives 36. What is the main purpose for this course?
h) Aim of this course is to provide a base to students for his future research and study
planning.
i) After successful completion of this course student will be able to understand Fundamentals
of Semiconductors, Physics and working principle of P-N Junctions, Bipolar Junction
Transistors, MOS Capacitors and MOS Field-Effect-Transistors.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
60. Update the content periodically with reference new development .
61. Using new Book and Journals References.
62. Using Web References.
63. Increase use of IT.
64. Increase use of Video Materials/Animation materials.
65. Introduction of open source specialized software for theoretical work.
66. Proper and increase use of multimedia in class.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
x
x 20
80
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Home
work
Discuss-
ions
Semiconductor Fundamentals Carrier
distribution functions, Carrier
densities, Carrier Transport 6 - - 6 4 2 4 2 18
Carrier recombination and
generation, Continuity equation, The
drift-diffusion model 6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 2
P-N Junctions: Electrostatic
analysis of a P-N diode, The P-N
diode current, Reverse bias
breakdown
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Bipolar Junction Transistors:
Structure and principle of operation,
Ideal transistor model, Non-ideal
effects, Base and collector transit
time effects, BJT circuit models, BJT
Technology.
6 - - 6 2 2 4 4 18
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
MOS Capacitors: Structure and
principle of operation, MOS analysis 9 - - 9 6 4 6 2 27
. MOS Field-Effect-Transistors:
Structure and principle of operation,
MOSFET models, Threshold
voltage, MOSFET Circuits and
Technology
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 3 9
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 21 22 24 17 132
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
5.25 Hours/Week
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Fundamental Concepts of Semiconductors and
Quantum Physics Developing basic
communicative
Ability through short
and varied situated
discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exams
Terminal Exam. (Final
Exam)
1.2 Energy bands in semiconductors
1.3
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors,
Dynamics of Charge Carriers
1.4 PN Junction, BJT,
1.5 JFET, MOSFET
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Can conduct general literature survey on particular
topic of semiconductor and devices under study.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging students
to discuss different
topics outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Can correlate and understanding the theoretical
results with experimental data .
2.3 Able to know some available simulation software
for any future research work.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students how
to make a good
presentation .
Encourage students to
help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other students
to understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through library
and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Mathematical Methods
4.1 Take part in discussion with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Interpret/operate differential equations, integrations,
and Matrix that often come lectures.
4.3
Rise to the point questions during the lecture, work
in groups, and communicate with class fellows and
with me electronically, and periodically visit the
web sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the
classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester 20%
5 Homework Every week
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
The student knowledge of the
basics of Semiconductor
Physics
Easily differentiate the semiconductor
materials from other related experiments. 1, 2 1 a, b
Understand and can describe different type
of semiconductor classification. 8,9 2,3 b,
Understand who quantum mechanics works
effectively in semiconductors 3,4 1,3 c, h
Learn the basic of
semiconductor charge carrier
statistics and its scientific
significance on device
performance.
Collect general information about
semiconductor and devices related topics.
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained theoretical results and
experimental tools to solve the problems. 8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 Gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive expression for junction device on the
basis of basic theories. 14,17 13 I
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
*First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week for Student Academic Counseling and Support
/,
1. List Required Textbooks
Physics of semiconductor devices, S.M. Sze, Wiley, (1981).
Semiconductor Physics and Devices, D. Neamen, McGraw Hill, 3rd Ed., 2003.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Semiconductors and semimetals, H.J. Novell, Academic Press, New York (1975).
Metal - Semiconductor Schottky Barrier junctions, B. L. Sharma, Plenum1
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Journal of Applied Physics
Applied Physics Letters
Physical Review B
Journal of Semiconductor Technology
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
en.wikipedia.org
pveducation.org
http:// faculty/aabdulmjid.edu.sa
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
MATHEMATICA,
MATLAB,
Origin
Labview
MathCAD
MS Office (particularly MS Excel)
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Furnished Lecture Room equipped with smart board and computer
Semiconductor Device fabrication Lab
Semiconductor Device Characterization Lab
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computational Lab with proper software
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi Internet Connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course/module evaluation system electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
department has its own teacher evaluation committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Mechanism is available for verification of Standards by
Course committee for each course/Module
Course Committee Check each results and student answer sheet
Course file maintained by teacher along with highest, middle and lowest grade student’s answer
sheets
Periodically improvement in course content with insertion the latest developments in the field
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
61- Course Evaluation
62- Exam Evaluation
63- Improvement plan
64- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
65- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______ Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed____________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __April 19, 2014_____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: ___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 10/4/2014
College/Department : College of Science / Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Materials Science (PHYS 474)
2. Credit hours: 3 (3+0+0)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Bachelor of Physics (BSc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course:
Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 8th
level / 4th
year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Solid State Physics 1 PHYS 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any): ---
8. Location if not on main campus:
Complex of colleges in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course?
This course aims to give fundamental knowledge about type of materials, their usage, properties
and characteristics, which are important in engineering design. It is also aimed to give a
theoretical background about the analysis of behavior of engineering materials by emphasizing
important relationships between internal structure and properties. It attempts to present ways of
modifying and control the material microstructures and especially mechanical properties
(toughness, strength, fatigue and creep resistance) by suitable heat treatment operation.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the
field)
It is intended in this course to:
67. Update the content periodically.
68. Spare more working hours on e-learning, where some lectures and short exams will be
delivered online.
69. Use more software simulations to some of the principles covered.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
√
√
10
90
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook
should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Wo
rk L
oa
d
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Classification of materials 3 3 3 1 2 1 12
Structure of crystalline solids 9 9 3 2 7 1 10
Imperfections in solids 6 6 2 1 3 1 8
Mid-term 1 1 1 1
Diffusion 3 3 2 1 2 1 14
Mechanical properties of metals 6 6 6 2 5 1 9
Dislocations and strengthening
mechanics 2 2 1 1 1 1 7
Phase diagrams 4 4 2 1 4
Mid-term 2 1 1 1
Phase transformations 3 3 2 1 3 1 10
Applications and processing of metal
alloys 5 5 5 3 5 1 7
Final Exam 2 2 2
Total 45 45 26 13 32 10 126
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 45 81 126
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
5.5 hours
NQF Learning Domains and Course Learning
Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 To know and list the basic types of materials. Lectures
In-class
discussions
Exercises
Exams.
Homework.
Classwork.
Quizzes.
1.2 Recognizing the different mechanical properties
and interpreting them.
1.3 Defining the main terms in phase diagrams.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Analyzing the stress-strain diagrams and
extracting all necessary information from it. Lectures.
Problem solving
Case study.
Small group
work.
Exams.
Homework.
Classwork.
Quizzes. 2.2
Discriminating between the different types of
phase diagrams and extracting all necessary
information from it.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 To participates in class discussion, and discusses
new ideas.
Group
assignments
Lectures.
Case study.
Small group
work.
Whole group
discussion.
Respecting
deadlines.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Showing active
class
participation.
Oral exams.
3.2
To act with self-reliance when working
independently. Displays teamwork and shows
professional commitment to ethical practice.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 To communicate with the teacher and students
using communications technology.
Encourage
students to use
program software
Whole group
discussion.
Lecture.
correspondences.
E-learning.
Exams.
Homework. 4.2
To use software programs in writing, inserting
and analyzing data, and plotting graphs.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
Provide a clear
understanding of the basic
concepts and integrating
their knowledge in the
To know and list the basic types of
materials. a, b 1, 2 a, b
Recognizing the different mechanical
properties and interpreting them. c, d, e 1, 2 c, d
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.) Week Due
Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam 5-6 20 %
2 Second Exam 10-11 20 %
3 Final Exam 16 40 %
4 Seminar 14 10 %
7 Quizzes --
10 % 8 Homework --
9 classwork --
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
At least 5 office hours weekly is assigned for student’s consultations and academic advices.
Additional academic advice could be sought from the academic advisor assigned for each student, or
from the unit of academic guidance.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks:
disciplines of science and
engineering principles
relevant to materials.
Defining the main terms in phase
diagrams. c, d, e 4, 5, 6 e, f
Student will read and
analyze the relationship
between
macro/microstructure,
characterization, phase
diagrams, properties and
processing and design of
materials.
Analyzing the stress-strain diagrams and
extracting all necessary information
from it.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9,
10 k, l
Discriminating between the different
types of phase diagrams and extracting
all necessary information from it.
g, h, i 7, 8, 9,
10 k
To participates in class discussion, and
discusses new ideas. j (4, 5) 11, 12 l, p
To act with self-reliance when working
independently.
j (1, 3, 4,
5) 12, 13 P
To communicate with the teacher and
students using communications
technology.
K (1 ,2,
3) 14 g
To use software programs in writing,
inserting and analyzing data, and
plotting graphs.
K (1 ,2,
3) 14 i
Materials science and engineering an introduction; W. D. Callister and D. G. Rethwisch; Wiley; 9th
edition; (2013).
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc.):
Foundations of Materials science and engineering; W. Smith and J. Hashemi; McGraw Hill; 5th
edition; (2009).
Introduction to Materials science for engineers; James F. Shackelford; McGraw Hill; 7th
edition; (2008).
4. List Electronic Materials (e.g. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://demonstrations.wolfram.com
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/salzobaidi http://www.engineersedge.com/manufacturing_menu.shtml
http://www.nist.gov/mml/
http://cmr.curtin.edu.au/
http://www3.fi.mdp.edu.ar/ingpolimeros/en
http://www.razi-center.net/
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Excel software for drawing graphs.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
1 classroom with the capacity of maximum 25 students is required. (available).
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
The classroom is equipped with a smart board and its running software ‘active inspire’.
AV outlets for the classroom.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
The statistics obtained from the students final results.
Student’s survey.
Holding a general meeting between the faculty members and all students to discuss all kind of
problems facing them regarding the teaching process.
The feedback from the personal interview of the student with his academic advisor.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
Complaint box.
Personal interviews with randomly selected students.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Annual refreshing training courses for the faculty members about the best teaching practices.
The discussion of all teaching difficulties and the methods for improvement at departmental
level.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample of
assignments with staff at another institution)
A committee of maximum three faculty members are assigned for each subject to review the
checking of the first, second and final exams.
An internal revision report is written by the committee for each course.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
The feedbacks of the students are studied carefully.
All feedbacks coming from the teachers of the course will be collected.
The committee of the curriculum will discuss all feedbacks and modifications needed.
The final decisions of the committee will then be studied in the department’s council.
In case of approval it is the job of the committee of the curriculum to proceed with all the
paper work needed.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Samir Al-zobaidi
Signature: Date Report Completed: 12/4/2014
Received by: Dr. Thamer Al-harbi Dean/Department Head
Signature: Date: /4/2014
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Renewable Energy // Phys 475
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Sajad Hussain
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 4th
Level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course?
30. To know about the renewable energy resources
31. To understand the different methods from solar radiation to energy
32. To develop an understanding of hydropower, wind power, biomass and their transportation
after storage
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
70. Update the content periodically.
71. Research papers in the development of renewable energy resources
72. Using web references.
73. increase use of IT
74. Use of small projects
x
x 20
80
75. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
76. Increased use of power-point and projector in class
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Orientation, registration and introduction to renewable energy
resources
3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Energy Fundamental; thermal energy
Photovoltaic solar cells
Electrochemical solar cells 6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - 2
General information about hydrothermal power projects and
their designs
6 - - 6 3 3 4 2 18
How to get energy from wind, ocean and tides 6 - - 6 4 2 3 3 18
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 2
Biomass and thermal energy
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Energy storage and transportation
9 - - 9 5 4 5 2 25
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 1 2 9
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 23 21 21 15 128
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 42 86 128
Credit 3 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Write down the fundamentals sources of renewable
energy Developing basic
communicative
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Videos of energy
generation
Homework.
Assignments
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Describe the solar radiation and solar energy;
(thermal, photovoltaic, Electrochemical)
1.3 Define and explain Alternatives sources of energy
(Hydro, wind, biomass and waves energy) 1.4 Different method to conversation and storage of energy
1.5 Transportation of energy and effect on the environment
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1
Ability to think, understand and solve out the
problem
a) Identification and
solution of problems by
the students
b)Assignments for
designing small projects
for energy generation
c) Individual meeting with
the instructor
Class Participation
Presentation Evaluation of the given
tasks and give marks Unseen problem to be
solved
2.2 Small projects commercially available
2.3 Applications of acquired knowledge in practical life
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management. Discussion with
students about their
projects
Projects independently
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Submission of project
report
Showing active class
participation.
Work on projects
Giving clear and
logical arguments
3.2 Learn how to search for recent research work
from web
3.3 Present a short report on small projects and
orally using appropriate scientific language
5.30 hours
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will be able to design small projects Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program for
the efficiency of
solar cells
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Students will be able to find out the data
regarding their projects
4.3
Search out the previous data regarding their
projects from web.
Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
To understand basic
knowledge of the renewable
energy resources
Solar Radiation. 1, 2 1 a, b
Describe the different techniques to convert
these radiation to energy 8,9 2,3 b,
Alternative sources in our practical life 3,4 1,3
c, h
Hydrothermal, Wind and Biomass 2,4 3 C, h
Learn the different design for
getting energy from natural
resources.
Literature review about conversion of
radiation into energy 7 6,7 H,f
Apply the different designs for getting
higher efficiency 8,9 8 g
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 h
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally using appropriate scientific language. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Derive different methods to get energy 14,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1-Energy and Environment; R. A. Ristinan and J. P. Kraushaar; 2nd
Edition (2005); Wiley;ISBN-
10:0471739898
2- Energy studies; William Shepherd, David W. Shepherd, D. W. Shepherd; 2nd
Ed. (2003) World
Scientific Publishing Company.; ISBN-10:1860943225
9. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1- All journals related to solar and energy
2- Renewable Energy: Power for a Sustainable Future; Godfrey Boyle; 3rd
Edition (2012); Oxford
University Press, USA;ISBN-10:0199545332
3- Fundamentals of Renewable Energy Processes;Aldo V. da Rosa; 2rd
Edition9129; Academic
Press; ISBN-10: 0123972191
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
Smart board
http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/
http://sciencedirect.com
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Office micro soft
Software for solarcells
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. softwares and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, tours to power projects and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University and questionary after
completion course work
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
31. Course report.
32. Program report.
33. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 66- Course Evaluation
67- Exam Evaluation
68- Project Evaluation
69- Improvement plan
70- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
71- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ________Sajad Hussain _(Ph.D)____________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ___12-04-2014____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution: Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department: College of Science in AlZulfi/ Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Nuclear Physics II PHYS 482
2. Credit hours:3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Undergraduate Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Elective /fourth year 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Nuclear Physics I // PHYS 481
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) Not Applicable
8. Location if not on main campus: College of Science in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The course is available in my webpage. The model of instructor is distributed and used two items
above.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course? The course describes the properties of nuclei, various nuclear models, accelerators, and elementary
particles.
By the end of this course, students are expected to:
31. Describe the force between nucleons. 32. Evaluate nuclear properties by using nuclear models. 33. List accelerators. 34. State nuclear spin and moments. 35. Recognize meson physics. 36. Define elementary particles.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
Through coursework and workgroups, students are expected to cultivate the following
attitudes and dispositions:
9. Confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge.
10. Desire for continuous and independent learning.
11. Appreciation for the dynamic role of accelerators in science.
√
√
40
60
12. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
13. Increased use of IT and web based reference material.
14. Changes in content as a result of new research in the field.
15. Adapting the contents to the level of the students and the number registered in the section.
16. Adapting the course to the students' specialties.
I use information technology to view and illustrate the concepts of physics means.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Homewo
rk
Discussio
ns
The force between nucleons 6 - - 6 4 4 2 3 19
Nuclear models 6 - - 6 4 4 2 3 19
First Exam - - - 2 - 2
Accelerators 6 - - 6 3 4 2 3 18
Nuclear spin and moments 3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Meson physics 6 - - 6 5 4 5 4 24
Second Exam - - - 2 2
Elementary particles 9 - - 9 3 5 3 3 23
Review 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 23 25 18 21 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester): 45
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours
39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 List the fundamental forces in nature, quark theory and the origin of nuclear force, inter nucleon force.
5. Giving class
lectures to
summarize course
content.
4. Solving problems
and examples.
5. Outlining important
applications and
significance of
topics covered.
6. Solving the monthly
tests and discussion
to take advantage of
mistakes.
1. Homework.
2. Group Discussion
3. Presentation
4. Quizzes.
5. First and second
exams.
6. Final exam.
1.2 Outline nuclear models (liquid drop model, shell model, collective model).
1.3 Describe elementary particles, fundamental symmetries and gauge theory, lepton-hadrons interactions, quantum chromo dynamics, electro-weak interactions, physics of modern accelerators.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Prepare the physics principles to solve basic problem
involving the application of the concepts of nuclear
physics.
8) Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered.
9) Problem solving. 10) Class discussion. 11) Project
presentation
1. I always summarize the
previous lesson with a session
questions and answers, to help
them regain and remember
information earlier.
2. I preserve the clarity of
voice, and communicate with
students.
3. I help them answer the
questions themselves when
they are face with difficulty.
With this, they learn
independence and logical
thinking. I support their
thinking skills through the
development process in
dealing with the basic ideas
and facts. I also support
reaching conclusions on issues
and problems solving in an
orderly and sequentially
manner.
2.2 Summarize all physics principles to Link with previous lectures.
2.3 Design a map to get all physics principles to solve problems.
2.4 Subdivide elementary particles to families.
3
4. I try to represent their
concepts in the classroom.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Justify to complete assignments in due time. 1. I encourage the student
to attend lectures regularly
by giving bonus marks for
attendance, give students
tasks, and ask questions
about previous lectures.
2. Mutual respect is
between the lecturer and
students and among
students themselves. I deal
with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
3. I apply educational
standards and behavioral
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit
and good character.
I enable students to
communicate with me
discuss any needs they
have related to the course,
and I welcome students'
comments when they face
challenging problems.
3.2 Analyze participations in class discussion and think
critically.
20) Take attendance
21) Class discussions
22) Grade quizzes.
23) Respect deadlines.
24) Give clear and
logical arguments.
25) Show active class
participation.
26) Perform serious on
monthly and final
exams.
3.3 Show acting responsibly and ethically in carrying
out individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Evaluate their strengths and weaknesses as
members of a team.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will be able to communicate with teacher, ask
questions, solve problems, and use computers.
Students solve problems on
the smart board. I giving
them group assignments and
homeworks and encourage
group projects, but I can say
that technology has become
an integral part of their lives,
and use computer programs
to draw and solve
mathematical equations,
derivation and integration
and they feel confident in this
area.
Make some part of
course grade on these
things.
4.2 Students will be able to deal with confidence with
differential equations, integrations, and differentials.
Although this skill is not taught within the course, it is
necessary to deal with him.
4.3 Students ask questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and with me
electronically, and periodically visit the sites I
recommended.
4.4 Students use information technology in the classroom.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Students will learn to
acknowledge of the
force between nucleons.
List nuclear force properties.
1,12
1,2
a, b, e
Describe spin, parity, magnetic
dipole moment and electric
quadrupole moment.
10
4,5
b, c, h
Apply the exchange force model to
find the range of exchange particle
between nucleons.
8,10
3,4
f, h, i
Students are expected
to use nuclear models to
find nuclear properties.
Find nuclear spin of 17O by using
shell model
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Identify parity of 17N by using shell
model
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Apply shell model to find magnetic
dipole moment and electric
quadrupole moment.
6,10,21
2
e, k, n
Students are expected
to familiar with
different types of
accelerators.
Classify accelerators with respect to
their energies.
1, 11, 12
7
d, i
Compare between Cockcroft and
Van de Graaf accelerators.
10
1,3
o
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet.
12
12
i, m, n,
o
Students are expected
to classify Elementary
particles
Calculate isospin of pions.
2
2,3
k, n, o
Classify interactions that are
conserved baryon and lepton
number s.
1, 11
4,5
o
Describe the quark model
13
6, 15
o
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20% 5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week) Four office hours per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Introductory Nuclear Physics, K.S. Krane,3
ed edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
6) Introduction to Nuclear Science, J. C. Bryan, CRC Press,2nd
edition, 2013.
7) Concepts of Modern Physics, Beiser, McGraw Hill, 6th
edition
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) Quantum Mechanics, S. Gasiorowicz, 3
ed Edition, Wiley, 2003
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
www.eagle.co.uk/news/ppnews.html
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
http://vlib.org/physics.html
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software: Mathematica Program is used to solve deferential equations, integrals.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab., internet lab and calculator.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list): Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically is organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 34. Course report.
35. Program report.
36. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
72- Course Evaluation.
73- Exam Evaluation.
74- Improvement plan.
75- Program Outlearning with course outlearning.
76- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: Dr. Thamer Alharbi
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution Majmaah University Date of Report 25/3/1435
College/Department College of Science Al-Zulfi / Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Radiation Physics // PHYS 485
2. Credit hours 3 hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Program (B.Sc.)
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ahmed Adel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
PHYS 481
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
No
8. Location if not on main campus
College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 85% and
Traditional online with 15%]
B Objectives
What is the main purpose for this course?
By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
1- Develop a clear understanding of different types of ionizing radiation, radiation quantities and
their units.
2- Understand of impacts of ionizing radiation on health.
3- Be familiar with the radiation protection and shielding
4- Demonstrate the principles of radioactive waste management.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
9. Annual review of the course using recent textbooks and references.
10. Electronic materials and computer based programs are used to support the lecture
course.
11. Increase use of video material
12. Exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
√
√
85 %
15 %
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
Fundamentals of ionizing radiation
Physics 3 - - 3 2 1 2 1 9
Radiation dose and units 3 - - 3 1 1 3 1 9
Radiation interaction with matter 3 - - 3 2 1 3 1 10
Neutrons and their interaction with
matter 3 - - 3 2 1 3 1 10
Mid-term 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Instruments for measuring
personal radiation doses 3 - - 3 1 1 2 1 8
Radiation monitoring and
radioactive contamination 3 - - 3 2 1 3 1 10
Mid-term 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Radiation Shielding 6 - - 6 2 1 3 2 14
Biological effects of ionizing radiation 6 - - 6 2 2 3 1 14
Radiation protection standards 3 - - 3 2 2 3 1 11
Recommendations of IAEC 3 - - 3 2 2 2 1 10
Radioactive waste management 6 - - 6 3 2 2 1 14
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 42 - - 48 21 15 29 12 125
Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester):
Credit Contact hours Self-Study Others Total
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical
NCAAA 3 48 ---
--- --- 77
--- 125
ECTS 5 48 ---
--- --- 77
--- 125
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
6. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment
Methods and Teaching Strategy
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop.
A description of teaching strategies used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Recognize different types of ionizing radiation. Developing basic
communicative ability
through:
- Lecturing
- Team work
- Discussion
- Exercises
- Class Participation
- Graded homework
- Quizzes
- Midterms
- Final Exam
1.2 Identify radiation doses and their units.
1.3 Identify different types of biological effects of radiation.
1.4 Describe radiation protection and shielding.
1.5 Recognize the proper procedure of radioactive waste
management
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Demonstrate the ability to solve basic problems
involving the application of the concepts of radiation
physics in those practical situations covered in the
course.
- Problem solving
-Class discussion
-Project presentation
- Class Participation
- Presentation
- Essay Question
- Research 2.2 Ability to select the proper radiation detection system.
2.3 Apply the gained mathematical and experimental
knowledge in any physical related topic.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3 Hours
3.1 Completing assignments in due time.
-Discussion with students
- Making students aware
about time management in
completing their assignments
and projects
-Encourage students to help
each other
- Group presentation
- Group assignments
- Evaluation of group reports
and individual contribution
within the group
- Peer or self-assessment
-Performance on midterms
and final exams are evidence
of the student’s ability to
retain and analyze information
3.2 Participate in class discussion and think critically.
3.3 Acting responsibly and ethically in carrying out
individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Communicate, listen, negotiate, and evaluate their
strengths and weaknesses as members of a team.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Developing the student skills in the usage of computer,
network, and software packages relevant to nuclear
physics.
- Exercises
- Problem solving
- Oral quizzes
- Essay questions
-Oral Presentation
-Oral Examination
-Essay Question
4.2 Improving student communication skills such as :
writing, reading, presenting, negotiating and debating
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Develop a clear
understanding of different
types of ionizing radiation,
radiation quantities and their
units.
Recognize different types of
ionizing radiation. 1,2 2 a,b
Identify radiation doses and their
units. 1,2 2 a
Understand of impacts of
ionizing radiation on health
Identify different types of biological
effects of radiation
1,2,5 1,4 c
Describe direct and indirect
mechanisms of ionizing radiation
effects
10, 20 5, 6 b, d
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 18 12 p
Be familiar with the
radiation protection and
shielding
Describe radiation shielding for
each radiation type
2,5 2 c
Derive Mathematical Formulations
of the Buildup Factor.
21 4 c
Calculate proper thickness and type
of shield for each radiation type. 6 4 d
Demonstrate the principles
of radioactive waste
management
Classify the radioactive waste 1,2 2
a,b
List the fundamental principles of
radioactive waste management. 2 2 g
Recognize the proper procedure of
radioactive waste management
13 6 o
The development of
students' mental abilities.
Present a short report in a written
form and orally using appropriate
scientific language.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Construct the mathematical
formulation suitable for the
theoretical analysis of various decay
modes.
14,17 13 i
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 5 20%
2 Second exam* 11 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation -
20%
5 Homework Weekly
6 Quizzes End of topics
7 Discussions Weekly
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials -
10 Computer tools used Every report
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Office hours 6 hr/ week.
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Introductory Nuclear Physics, K.S. Krane,2
nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1988.
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Physics for Radiation Protection, James E. Martin, Wiley, 2013.
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) Radiation Physics for Medical Physicists, Ervin B. Podgorsak, Springer, 2010
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.) http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Radiation
http://vlib.org/physics.html
http://dir.yahoo.com/science/physics
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software. Mathematica, Matlab
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
3. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room with at least 25 seats.
Auditorium of a capacity of not less than 100 seats for large lecture format classes
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.) A smart board to write on and computer.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list) Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching Student evaluation electronically organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor There is a department committee responsible for the development of the strategies of Teaching.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 37. Course report.
38. Program report.
39. Training Courses.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution)
Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 77- Course Evaluation
78- Exam Evaluation
79- Improvement plan
80- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
81- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution: Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department: College of Science in AlZulfi/ Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Neutron Physics and Reactors PHYS 487
2. Credit hours:3
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Physics Undergraduate Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Elective /fourth year 6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Nuclear Physics I // PHYS 481
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) Not Applicable
8. Location if not on main campus: College of Science in Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The course is available via my webpage. The model of instructor is distributed and used two items
above.
B Objectives
1. What is the main purpose for this course? The course describes the properties of neutron physics and reactors. By the end of this course, students are
expected to lean about: Neutron reactions: cross-sections, attenuation, reaction rate, fission cross-section.
Nuclear fission, fission yield, Energy distribution among fission neutrons and fragments, regeneration
factor. Thermal neutrons: energy distribution, effective cross section, moderation, average energy loss,
Average energy logarithmic decrement, SDP,MR and resonance escape probability. The Nuclear chain
reaction: neutron cycle, thermal utilization factor and calculating the four factors formula, Neutron Physics,
Neutron Interactions, Neutron Diffusion and Moderation, Spatial Diffusion of Neutrons, One-Group
Reactor Equation, The Slab Reactor, Other Reactor Shapes, The One-Group Critical Equation, Thennal
Reactors, Reflected Reactors, Multigroup Calculations, Nuclear reactors and nuclear power, The Fission
Chain Reaction, Nuclear Reactor Fuels, Non-Nuclear Components of Nuclear Power Plants, Components of
Nuclear Reactors, Power Reactors and Nuclear Steam Supply Systems, Nuclear Cycles, Isotope Separation,
Fuel Reprocessing, Radioactive Waste Disposal, The time-dependent reactor, Classification of Time
Problems, Reactor Kinetics, Control Rods and Chemical Shim, Temperature Effects on Reactivity, Fission
Product Poisoning, Core Properties during Lifetime. Heat Removal from nuclear reactors, General
Thermodynamic Considerations, Heat Generation in Reactors, Heat Flow by Conduction, Heat Transfer to
Coolants, Boiling Heat Transfer and Thennal Design of a Reactor.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g. increased
√
√
40
60
use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Through coursework and workgroups, students are expected to cultivate the following attitudes and
dispositions:
17. Confidence in one’s own physics skills and knowledge.
18. Desire for continuous and independent learning.
19. Appreciation for the dynamic role of neutron physics and reactors in science.
20. Awareness of career opportunities in physics.
21. Increased use of IT and web based reference material.
22. Changes in content as a result of new research in the field.
23. Adapting the contents to the level of the students and the number registered in the section.
24. Adapting the course to the students' specialties.
I use information technology to view and illustrate the concepts of physics means.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Homewo
rk
Discussio
ns
Neutron reactions: cross-sections, attenuation, reaction rate, fission cross-section
6 - - 6 4 4 2 3 19
Nuclear fission, fission yield, Energy distribution among fission neutrons and fragments, regeneration factor
6 - - 6 4 4 2 3 19
First Exam - - - 2 - 2
Thermal neutrons: energy distribution, effective cross section, moderation, average energy loss, Average energy logarithmic decrement, SDP, MR and resonance escape probability.
6 - - 6 3 4 2 3 18
The Nuclear chain reaction: neutron cycle, thermal utilization factor and calculating the four factors formula
3 - - 3 2 2 2 3 12
Nuclear reactors and nuclear power 6 - - 6 5 4 5 4 24
Second Exam - - - 2 2
Heat Removal from nuclear reactors 9 - - 9 3 5 3 3 23
Review 3 - - 3 2 2 2 2 11
Final Exam - - - 2 2
Total 39 - - 45 23 25 18 21 132
2. Course components (total contact hours and credits per semester): 45
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours
39 N/A N/A N/A 93 132
Credit 0.885 N/A N/A N/A 2.115 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment with Assessment Methods
and Teaching Strategy For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
1) A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended.
2) A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill.
3) The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the
domain concerned.
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 By the end of this course, the student should be able to:
1- List the neutron sources.
2- Define the moderator, the thermal neutrons and chain reaction.
3- Describe the neutron cycle.
4- Discuss the criticality of the reactor.
5- Define the plasma and fusion reaction.
6- Describe the mechanism of fusion reaction.
7- Discuss how the reactor technique.
6. Giving class
lectures to
summarize course
content.
7. Solving problems
and examples.
8. Outlining important
applications and
significance of
topics covered.
9. Solving the monthly
tests and discussion
to take advantage of
mistakes.
1. Homework.
2. Group Discussion
3. Presentation
4. Quizzes.
5. First and second
exams.
6. Final exam.
2.0 Cognitive Skills
3
2.1 1- Learn and recognize the neutron reaction with
matter, the neutron scattering and the fissionable
reaction.
2- Compute the average logarithmic energy, the slowing
down power and moderation ratio.
3- Analysis the data of the problems.
4- Identify the criticality of the reactor.
5- Understanding the roll of the moderator.
6- Compare between the heavy and light water reactor.
7- Recognize the mechanism of the fusion reaction.
12) Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered.
13) Problem solving. 14) Class discussion. 15) Project
presentation
1. I always summarize the
previous lesson with a session
questions and answers, to help
them regain and remember
information earlier.
2. I preserve the clarity of
voice, and communicate with
students.
3. I help them answer the
questions themselves when
they are face with difficulty.
With this, they learn
independence and logical
thinking. I support their
thinking skills through the
development process in
dealing with the basic ideas
and facts. I also support
reaching conclusions on issues
and problems solving in an
orderly and sequentially
manner.
4. I try to represent their
concepts in the classroom.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Justify to complete assignments in due time. 1. I encourage the student
to attend lectures regularly
by giving bonus marks for
attendance, give students
tasks, and ask questions
about previous lectures.
2. Mutual respect is
between the lecturer and
students and among
students themselves. I deal
with them as young
mature people, responsible
for their actions and
schedules.
3. I apply educational
standards and behavioral
control when they work in
groups, I can assess the
response of students as a
whole and the team spirit
and good character.
I enable students to
communicate with me
discuss any needs they
have related to the course,
and I welcome students'
comments when they face
challenging problems.
3.2 Analyze participations in class discussion and think
critically.
27) Take attendance
28) Class discussions
29) Grade quizzes.
30) Respect deadlines.
31) Give clear and
logical arguments.
32) Show active class
participation.
33) Perform serious on
monthly and final
exams.
3.3 Show acting responsibly and ethically in carrying
out individual as well as group projects.
3.4 Evaluate their strengths and weaknesses as
members of a team.
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Students will be able to communicate with teacher, ask
questions, solve problems, and use computers.
Students solve problems on
the smart board. I giving
them group assignments and
homeworks and encourage
group projects, but I can say
that technology has become
an integral part of their lives,
and use computer programs
to draw and solve
mathematical equations,
derivation and integration
and they feel confident in this
area.
Make some part of
course grade on these
things.
4.2 Students will be able to deal with confidence with
differential equations, integrations, and differentials.
Although this skill is not taught within the course, it is
necessary to deal with him.
4.3 Students ask questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and with me
electronically, and periodically visit the sites I
recommended.
4.4 Students use information technology in the classroom.
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
Students will learn to
acknowledge of neutron
physics.
List the neutron sources.
1,12
1,2
a, b, e
Describe the neutron cycle.
10
4,5
b, c, h
Apply Fick's law to find the
intensity of neutrons.
8,10
3,4
f, h, i
Students are expected
to identify and
characterize neutron
sources and interaction
with matter.
Find energy of neutron after passing
through a matter.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Identify the thermal neutron and
moderator.
6,10,21
3,4
f, h, k,
n
Derive the neutron velocity at the
maximum of Maxwellian flux
distribution.
6,10,21
2
e, k, n
Students are expected
to familiar with
different types of
nuclear reactors.
Classify nuclear reactors.
1, 11, 12
7
d, i
Compare between the heavy and
light water reactors.
10
1,3
o
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet.
12
12
i, m, n,
o
Students are expected
to learn about heat
removal from nuclear
Describe the independently the
controlling chain reaction.
2
2,3
k, n, o
reactors Classify methods that are used to
remove heat from reactors.
1, 11
4,5
o
Describe the heat removal from
nuclear reactors.
13
6, 15
o
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week) Four office hours per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks Nuclear Reactor Kinetics and Plant Control; Yoshiaki Oka and Katsuo Suzuki; 2013; Springer; ISBN:
4431541942
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
8) Introduction to Nuclear Reactor Theory; John R. Lamars;1st Ed. (1966); Addison-Wesley ISBN:
0201041200.
9) Introductory Nuclear Physics; K.S. Krane; 3rd Ed. (1987), Wiley; ISBN: 047180553X
10) Fundamentals of Nuclear Reactor Physics; Elmer E. Lewis; 1st (2002); Academic Press; ISBN:
0123706319 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
Introduction to Nuclear Engineering; J. Lamarsh and A. Baratta;3rd
Ed. (2001);Prentice Hall; ISBN:
0201824981.
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/mabuseileek/
Reactor PhysicsThe Diffusion of Neutrons 5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software: Mathematica Program is used to solve deferential equations, integrals.
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.) Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer.
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab., internet lab and calculator.
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list): Library, and Seminar Room, Wi-Fi internet connections.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically is organized by the University.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching 40. Course report.
41. Program report.
42. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which may be reviewed by members of the
teaching staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The
course should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of
study. Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
82- Course Evaluation.
83- Exam Evaluation.
84- Improvement plan.
85- Program Outlearning with course outlearning.
86- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course.
Faculty or Teaching Staff: Dr. Mohammed Hassen Eid Abu-Sei'leek
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: Dr. Thamer Alharbi
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 25/3/1435
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Physics Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code elementary particle physics // Phys484
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs) Physics
Program (B.Sc.) 4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: elective 7th
level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Phys 481
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives
37. What is the main purpose for this course?
The standard model for electroweak and strong interactions. Feynman rules.
Quantitative comparing of theory and experiments for scattering and disintegration
processes. Neutrino physics. CKM mass mixing matrix. Higgs mechanism,
supersymmetry and unified theories. Experiments from accelerators and astroparticle
physics.
x
x 20
80
38. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented.
(e.g. increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new
research in the field)
1. Update the content periodically.
2. Using new references.
3. Using web references.
4. increase use of IT
5. increase use of video material
6. exploring the possibility of introducing students to a specialized software
Increased use of power-point and projector in class
7. Giving class lectures to summarize course content.
8. Solving problems and examples.
9. Outlining important applications and significance of topics covered. Solving the
monthly tests and discussion to take advantage of mistakes.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be
attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact
hours T
ota
l o
f co
nta
ct
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Inte
rnet
Lib
rary
Ho
mew
ork
Dis
cuss
ion
s
SUBJECT 1: Quarks and Leptons.( the standard Model,
fermions and bosons, particle s and antiparticles, free
wave equations, Leptons & quark flavours 3 - - 3 2 1 2 1 9
CHAPTER 2: Interaction and field.( classical and
quantum pictures of interactions, the boson propagator,
feynman diagrams, Electromagnetic, strong, weak &
gravitational interactions and the cross sections, decays
and resonances. CHAPTER 3: invariance principles and
conservation laws.
6 - - 6 2 1 3 2 14
2 - - 2 - 2
CHAPTER 4: Quarks and Hadrons (charm and beauty,
comparison of quarkonium and positronium levels, the
baryon decuplet, quark spin and color, the baryon octet,
quark andtiquark combinations, …..
6 - - 6 3 2 3 2 16
CHAPTER 5: lepton and quark scattering CHAPTER
6: quark interaction and QCD ( the colour quantum
number, the QCD Potential at short and large distances,
Gluon Jet, coupling in QCD and QED, Gluonium and
quark-gluon plasma
6 - - 6 3 2 3 4 18
2 - - 2 2
CHAPTER 10: Particle Physics and cosmology 9 - - 9 5 3 4 2 23
CHAPTER 11: Experimental methods ( Accelerators,
colliding beams, accelerator complexes, secondary
particle separators, detectors of single charmed particles,
shower detectors and calorimeters
9 - - 9 5 3 3 2 22
SUBJECT 1: Quarks and Leptons.( the standard Model,
fermions and bosons, particle s and antiparticles, free
wave equations, Leptons & quark flavours
3 - - 3 6 3 4 2 18
Exam 2 - - 2 2
48 - - 48 26 15 22 15 126
2. Course components (total contact hours , self-study and credits per semester):
Lecture Tutorial Laboratory Practical Other: Total
Contact
Hours 48 78 126
Credit 1.46 1.54 3
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
The students are given an introduction to elementary particle physics that allows them to prepare for
a master or PhD degree in this field. Tools are used to calculate and simulate various high energy
processes.
After the course, students are expected to know about:
17. Feynman rules
18. Neutrino physics
19. Higgs mechanism
20. CKM mass mixing matrix
21. Experiments from accelerators and astroparticle physics
22. The Standard Model (SM) for Electroweak (EW) and Strong interactions (QCD)
23. Beyond the SM theories, such as supersymmetry (SUSY) and Grand unified theories (GUT)
24. Quantitative comparison of theory and experiments for scattering and disintegration
processes
3.5
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1
Feynman rules
Neutrino physics
Higgs mechanism
CKM mass mixing matrix Developing basic
communicative
Ability through
short and varied
situated discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exam
Final test
1.2 Experiments from accelerators and astroparticle
physics
1.3 The Standard Model (SM) for Electroweak
(EW) and Strong interactions (QCD)
1.4 Beyond the SM theories, such as
supersymmetry (SUSY) and Grand unified
theories (GUT)
1.5 Quantitative comparison of theory and
experiments for scattering and disintegration
processes
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 To show a connection between elementary
physics and some contemporary tasks in physics
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging
students to discuss
different topics
outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2
2.3
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 To improve the critical thinking skills of the
graduate students.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
Respecting dead
lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other
students to 3.2
3.3
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students
how to make a good
presentation in
French.
Encourage students
to help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Numerical
4.1 Communicate with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students
to use program soft
wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Illustrate deal with confidence with differential
equations, integrations, and differentials.
4.3
Operate questions during the lecture, work in
groups, and communicate with each other and
with me electronically, and periodically visit
the sites I recommended. Students use information technology in the classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA Asiin
The students are given an introduction to elementary particle physics that allows them to prepare for a master or PhD degree in this field. Tools are used to calculate and simulate various high energy processes.
Compare analytical calculations to
predictions of simulation programmes such
as CompHEPRead publications in the field
of particle physics.
1, 2 1 a, b
Calculate, using Feynman techniques, cross
sections for various processes, as well as
decay widths or lifetimes of particle
resonances.
8,9 2,3 b,
Interpret experimental results within or beyond
the Standard Model.
3,4 1,3
c, h
Write project reports and prepare and hold
short presentations.
2,4 3 C, h
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
* First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
Learn the basic elementary
particle concepts and
principles,
Compare analytical calculations to
predictions of simulation programmes such
as CompHEPRead publications in the field
of particle physics.
7 6,7 H,f
Calculate, using Feynman techniques, cross
sections for various processes, as well as
decay widths or lifetimes of particle
resonances.
8,9 8 g
Interpret experimental results within or beyond
the Standard Model.
6,7 9 h
Write project reports and prepare and hold
short presentations.
10, 14 11 gh
The development of students'
mental abilities.
Write project reports and prepare and hold
short presentations.
12,18 10,12 J,k
Write project reports and prepare and hold short presentations. 14,17 13 i
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week
E. Learning Resources
1. List Required Textbooks
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
Introduction to High Energy Physics (by Donald H. Perkeins) 3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1. Quarks and Leptons (by Francis Hazen, Alan D.Martin)
2. Particle Physics (by B.R.Martin and G. Show) Second Edition 4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
http://particleadventure.org/
http://www.cern.ch 5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
Microsoft Office
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Lecture room, a smart board to write on and computer
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computer Lab. and internet lab. 3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi internet connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Student evaluation electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
There is a department committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
43. Course report.
44. Program report.
45. Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Efficiency of course will be reflected on the results of the class, which reviewed by members of the teaching
staff in addition to other duties such as discussing ideas and ways of teaching and learning. The course
should be developed periodically to ensure that it contains the latest developments in the field of study.
Development could be put as an objective in the report of the course to be achieved each semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement. 87- Course Evaluation
88- Exam Evaluation
89- Improvement plan
90- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
91- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: _____Dr. Mohammad Abu Shayeb____________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: ____________________
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________
Institution : Majmaah University Date of Report: 20-4-2014 (20/6/1435)
College/Department : Zulfi College of Science // Department of Physics
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Nanotechnology // (PHYS 476)
2. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs):
BS-Physics, 4 Years Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Optional (6) / 3th
Year
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): Solid State Physics-1 PHYS 471
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any) No
8. Location if not on main campus : Department of Physics, Zulfi College of Science Al-Zulfi
9. Mode of Instruction (mark all that apply)
a. Traditional classroom What percentage?
b. Blended (traditional and online) What percentage?
c. e-learning What percentage?
d. Correspondence What percentage?
f. Other What percentage?
Comments:
The mode of instructor is distributed and used two items [Traditional classroom with 80% and
Traditional online with 20%]
B Objectives 39. What is the main purpose for this course?
j) Aim of this course is to provide a base to students for his future research and study
planning.
k) After successful completion of this course student will be able to understand Fundamentals
of Nanotechnology
l) To develop an interest in Student to study more for this emerging nanotechnologies by
providing interdisciplinary scientific and engineering knowledge necessary to
understand fundamental physical differences at the nanoscale. 2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being implemented. (e.g.
increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as a result of new research in
the field)
1. Update the content periodically with reference new development .
2. Using new Book and Journals References.
3. Using Web References.
4. Increase use of IT.
5. Increase use of Video Materials/Animation materials.
6. Introduction of open source specialized software for theoretical work.
7. Proper and increase use of multimedia in class.
x
x 20
80
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or handbook
should be attached)
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
(The credit point is equal 25-30 hours )
Topic
Contact hours
Tota
l o
f
con
tact
ho
urs
Self- Study
Tota
l h
ou
rs
Lec
ture
tuto
ria
ls
La
b
Internet Library Home
Work
Discuss-
ions
Historical development of
Nanoscience and technology, 6 - - 6 4 2 4 2 18
Formation of energy gap,
Discreteness of energy levels 6 - - 6 4 4 2 2 18
Mid-term 1 2 - - 2 2
Tunneling currents, 3 - - 3 1 2 2 1 9
Formation and characterization
of Nanolayers, Applications
of Nanolyers,
9 - - 9 4 4 6 3 28
Mid-term 2 2 - - 2 2
Synthesis and Fabrication of
Nanoparticles,Characterization
and Application of
Nanoparticles,
9 - - 9 6 4 6 2 27
Top Down Nanostructuring
Techniques, Nanodevices and
applications.
6 - - 6 2 4 4 2 18
Review 3 - - 3 1 2 3 9
Final Exam 2 - - 2 2
Total 48 - - 48 21 22 24 17 132
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week.
5:15 hours
4. Course Learning Outcomes in NQF Domains of Learning and Alignment
with Assessment Methods and Teaching Strategy:
NQF Learning Domains
And Course Learning Outcomes
Course Teaching
Strategies
Course Assessment
Methods
1.0 Knowledge
1.1 Historical development of Nanoscience and
technology Developing basic
communicative
Ability through short
and varied situated
discourse.
Lecturing
Team work
Exercises
Homework.
Group Discussion
Presentation
Mid-term exams
Terminal Exam. (Final
Exam)
1.2 Formation of energy gap, Discreteness of
energy levels, Tunneling currents,
1.3
Synthesis and Fabrication of
Nanoparticles,Characterization and Application
of Nanoparticles,
1.4 Formation and characterization of Nanolayers,
Applications of Nanolyers,
1.5 Top Down Nanostructuring Techniques,
Nanodevices and applications
2.0 Cognitive Skills
2.1 Can conduct general literature survey on particular
topic of under study.
Problem solving
Class discussion
presentation
Individual meeting
with the instructor
(encouraging students
to discuss different
topics outside the
classroom)
Class Participation
Presentation
Essay Question
Research
2.2 Can correlate and understanding the problem
solving techniques
2.3 Able to know some available simulation software
for any future research work.
3.0 Interpersonal Skills & Responsibility
3.1 Work in a group and learn time management.
Discussion with
students
Making students
aware about time
management in
completing their
assignments and
projects.
Counsel students how
to make a good
presentation .
Encourage students to
help each other
Group presentation
Group assignments
Respecting dead lines.
Showing active class
participation.
Helping other students
to understand tasks in
the class.
Giving clear and
logical arguments
Performing seriously
on midterms and final
exams
3.2 Learn how to search for information through library
and internet.
3.3 Present a short report in a written form and orally
using appropriate scientific language
4.0 Communication, Information Technology, Mathematical Methods
4.1 Take part in discussion with teacher, ask questions,
solve problems, and use computers. Exercises
Problem solving
oral quizzes
Essay questions
Encourage students to
use program soft wear
Write reports
Exercises related to
specific topics
4.2 Interpret/operate Nanomaterials and their formation
and properties.
4.3
Rise to the point questions during the lecture, work
in groups, and communicate with class fellows and
with me electronically, and periodically visit the
web sites I recommended.
Students use information technology in the
classroom
5.0 Psychomotor
5.1
5.2
5- Please fill in this table based on the following criteria:
Course Objectives: Course Outcomes: PLO NCAAA ASIIN
The student get the basics
knowledge of Physics of
Nanomaterials.
Easily understand about the dimensionality
associated with the materials 1, 2 1 a, b
Check and apply the different properties of
Materials at Nanoscale . 8,9 2,3 b,
Use the information about the formation of
energy gap and Discreteness of energy
levels for its application.
3,4 1,3 c, h
Understand different techniques use for the
formation and synthesis of nanoparticles
and structures.
2,4 3 C, h
Learn, understand and get
concepts of nanoscale.
Collect general information about Nanoscience and technology
7 6,7 H,f
Apply the gained information that how to
use the Nanoscience and technology in
different fields.
8,9 8 G
Work in a group and learn time
management. 6,7 9 H
Learn how to search for information
through library and internet. 10, 14 11 Gh
The development of students'
intellectual abilities.
Present a short report in a written form and
orally on given topics. 12,18 10,12 J,k
Understand Synthesis and Fabrication of
Nanoparticles,Characterization and
Application of Nanoparticles and their
applications
14,17 13 I
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination, speech, oral presentation, etc.)
Week Due Proportion of Total
Assessment
1 First exam* 6 20%
2 Second exam* 12 20%
3 Lab. Exam -
4 Presentation One/ semester
20%
5 Homework Every week
6 Quizzes End topics
7 Discussions Every week
8 Team group Three time/ semester
9 Tutorials Every sub topic
10 Computer tools used Every report and presentation
11 Project -
12 Peer project -
13 Final exam * End of the semester 40%
Total 100 %
*First exam, second exam and final exam are written exam
D. Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty and teaching staff for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time teaching staff are expected to be available each week)
Four office hour per week for Student Academic Counseling and Support
1. List Required Textbooks
10. R. Fahrner 2010 “Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics Materials, Devices, Measurement
Techniques”. Springer
2. List Essential References Materials (Journals, Reports, etc.)
1. Guo Zhong Cao 2011 “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials synthesis, properties and
applications ” Imperial college press
2. Fritz H. Frimmel and R. Niessner 2010 “Nanoparticles in the Water Cycle: Properties,
Analysis and Environmental Relevance” Springer
3. List Recommended Textbooks and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc)
1. Nature Nanotechnology, by Nature Publishing Group,
2. Nano Letters, by American Chemical Society,
3. Small, by Wiley-VCH,
4. Nano Today, by Elsevier,
5. Lab on a Chip, by Royal Society of Chemistry,
6. Nanotechnology, by Institute of Physics
7. Current Nanoscience, by Bentham Science
4. List Electronic Materials (eg. Web Sites, Social Media, Blackboard, etc.)
en.wikipedia.org
http:// faculty/aabdulmjid.edu.sa
Next Big Future: A look at what our future could look like, with the help of nanotech.
Nanotechnology Today: The latest information and news related to nanotechnology and more.
Nanotechnology Development Blog: Learn about how nanotech is developing and read about
the latest breakthroughs.
Nanotechnology Now: News and information related to nanotechnology and related
developments.
Nanotechnology News and Information: Just what it sounds like, this blog features the latest
in news on nanotech, as well as jobs in the field.
5. Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional standards or regulations and
software.
MATHEMATICA,
MATLAB,
MathCAD
MS Office (particularly MS Excel)
Virtual NanoLab
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e. number of seats in
classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Classrooms, laboratories, demonstration rooms/labs, etc.)
Furnished Lecture Room equipped with smart board and computer
Lab for nanotechnology Fabrication and Characterization (for Future improvement)
2. Computing resources (AV, data show, Smart Board, software, etc.)
Computational Lab with proper software
3. Other resources (specify, e.g. if specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements or attach
list)
Library, and Seminar Room , Wi-Fi Internet Connections
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course/module evaluation system electronically organized by the University
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Program/Department Instructor
department has its own teacher evaluation committee 3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Course report.
Program report.
Training Courses
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an independent
member teaching staff of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of tests or a sample
of assignments with staff at another institution) Mechanism is available for verification of Standards by
Course committee for each course/Module
Course Committee Check each results and student answer sheet
Course file maintained by teacher along with highest, middle and lowest grade student’s answer
sheets
Periodically improvement in course content with insertion the latest developments in the field
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness and planning for
improvement.
92- Course Evaluation
93- Exam Evaluation
94- Improvement plan
95- Program Outlearning with course outlearning
96- Outlearning from the pre-requisite course
Faculty or Teaching Staff: ______ Prof. Dr. Abdul Majid Abdul Majeed____________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date Report Completed: __April 24, 2014_____
Received by: _____________________________ Dean/Department Head: ___________________
Signature: _______________________________ Date: _______________